Home

Tektronix Telescope 071-0855-05 User's Manual

1. 10 Gh s Rx 1 Al A2 JO p M Regenerate B1 B2 Parity Sequence EE B1 x E1 00 F1 00 Overwrite Incoming PEN G 10 Gb s Px 1 D1 00 D2 00 D3 00 I JO Trace C1 Byte Hi H2 H3 j M E1 Mo B2 K 00 K2 00 mi Setzu 10 Gb s Tx 1 D4 o0 D5 00 D6 o0 M D1 D3 Section DCC D7 D8 DO D T K1 K2 APS o 00 po po M D4 D12 Line DCC OTS91T3 D10 00 D11 00 D12 00 I 1 Syne Status 10 Gh s Tx 1 g f Hii si po z fo E2 00 rm i Edit Overhead gz o it Overheai OTS92R1 Jitter E2 anabea tl n Section Trace J0 oo zl Trace Tektronix BTT Length 16 Bytes Edit JO Trace ilk lt j Figure 2 11 Transmitter Transport Overhead menu OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Edit Overhead To edit the overhead click the Edit Overhead button This brings up a dialog box shown in Figure 2 12 The dialog box displays accessible overhead bytes in white while the non applicable boxes for the function are grayed out they do not apply to the selection The grayed out bytes are not available for editing To edit all other bytes highlight the appropriate box and type in the desired entry To set the overhead back to its default state click the Restore Defaults button When editing is complete click OK to return to the main screen Signal Transport Overheag Overhead for STS 1 1 Overhead for STS 1 1 Al A2 B1 E1 D1 00 D2 H1 32 D4 00 D7 00
2. E2 S1 Restore Defaults Section Trace JO Trace Tektronix BT1 Figure 2 12 Edit Overhead dialog box OTS9100 User Manual 2 31 Operating Basics User Interface 2 32 Through Mode When using through mode a number of the overhead bytes may be overwritten as the external signal passes through the card This is done through the use of the Through Mode selections available in the Overhead menu as shown in Figure 2 13 If the box is checked for Regenerate B1 B2 Parity the receiver will recalculate the B1 B2 parity and insert the new information into the overhead as the signal is passed through the card To disable B1 B2 parity regeneration ensure that the Regenerate B1 B2 Parity box is not selected Through Mode F Regenereta B1 E2 Perity Overwrite Incoming F J0Trecs A Byle B rF r 0 03 Sedan DCC F KI K2APS F DA D12 Line DCC F S1 Syme Statue rm r 22 B Figure 2 13 Through Mode Overwrite menu To overwrite an incoming byte click in the box beside the selection under the Overwrite Incoming heading If you wish to keep a byte from being overwritten make sure the box beside the selection is not selected The bytes available to be overwritten are JO Trace C1 Byte E1 F1 D1 D3 Section DCC K1 K2 APS D2 D12 Line DCC S1 Sync Status M1 Z2 and E2 Parity regeneration is always enabled if the user chooses to overwrite any incoming Overhead bytes NOTE There is no expl
3. ccccccceeeeeeeecceceeeeesececeaeceeeeeeesecsacaeeeeeeesetensuaeeeeeess 2 2 Receive Analysis ivi deciennne ti dineciein air a aiaa iii i a aAa EA NAA i ai ian 2 5 Transmit Generation nease aiee aeee aeai aiaa aiae a aa E a 2 7 Glock Trigg nenatura darii ee shen E E tle el ee ene 2 9 Software Interface Operating BasiCs cccccseeccssseeeeeseeneeeesseneeeeseseeeeeeseseeeenesseenens 2 11 Wsenlintenace 22 vice ate et ee ee ee aie kes aa diet ae aa 2 11 Elements of the User Interface ccccccceceeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeecnaeaeeeeeeeeeseceieaeeeeeeeeeteees 2 12 Navigation WiINdOW enssins ce head eee ee eeii a iiaia 2 23 Setup Property Menus ccccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeceaceeceeeeesecenaeceeeeeseeessinaeeeeees 2 25 Transmitter Sigal senn E cevide deetieh aageibawenees 2 26 Transmitter Transport Overhead cececceceececeeeeeseceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeees 2 30 Transmitter Path Overhead ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeesecsneaeeeeeeeseesesnaeess 2 34 Transmitter Error Insertion ccccceceeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeseceneaeceeeeeeeeeeeennaees 2 37 Transmitter K1 K2 Decode 0000 0 ceecccccceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeaeseeeeeeeeseaaaneseeeeeeees 2 40 Transmitter IP Payload osina T EOT 2 43 Transmitter IP Error Insertion ccccceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeceneaeceeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 2 44 Receiver Signale rnia nesi ir a A E E ra 2 47 Receiver Trace Mismatch
4. cc cescecccceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeseseeeaaeaeeeeeeeeneeess 2 50 Receiver IP SetU ce e aa Seeks lad sac tadg tagieadtaccveddy teed las tested a aa anaia 2 54 SOLU P SUMITA a ase es tactics eta dad ca ede pecan de Bo eda eg aa cata ot dae eee tt 2 55 Signal Monitor Men s san ametar a aade aa iaaa i aiias AAI AEA EREA A 2 56 Receiver Transport Overhead eccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeesecenaeeeeeeeeeteees 2 56 Receiver Path Overhead ccccccceceeeeceeceeeeeeeeecenaeeeeeeeeesencuaeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 58 Receiver K1 K2 Decode ni nanka aae a a diia 2 60 Receiver Payload srusen drie ri inai 2 61 Test CG ntrol Menur ize fos a e a ee a a aaa e eE 2 62 Test Control SUMIMANY erenn a ne A ENT 2 64 OTS9100 User Manual Table of Contents Measurements Menu 2 ccccceceeeececceceeeeeeeeeeesaeeeceeeeesesenaaeeeeeeeeesetennaeeeeeeeess 2 65 Receiver Real Titme ccccccceceeeeeeeeenceeceeeeeeeeseeeaeaeceseeeeeeeecanaeeeeeeeeeteees 2 65 Receiver Cumulative cececcecccceeeeeeeenneeeeeeeceeeteneaecaeceeeeeeeseneaaeeeeeeeeeteees 2 67 Receivers tristo ura un a aA pian inte isan 2 69 Receiver IP Measurements ececceceeeeeeeceecaeceeeeeeeseceanaeeeeeeeseneeaees 2 72 Transmitter IP Measurement cccccceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseceeeaeceeeeeeeeeeseenaees 2 73 Analysis Meon arire aaa aee narar eaa EE EE AEA NEESI thas EAA eatad situa ad dees 2 74 Analysi
5. SOURce OUTPut LASER This command enables or disables the Transmitter s output laser The query returns the current setting The laser when turned on takes some time to reach operating conditions during this time the query returns INITIALIZING Syntax SOURce lt slot gt OUTPut _LASER SOURce lt slot gt OUTPut _LASER lt Enum gt Parameters Description OFF Set laser off ON Set laser on INITializing The laser is initializing query response only OTS9100 User Manual 3 63 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce OUTPut LASer INFO OPTion This command queries the value of the device option code Syntax SOURce lt slot gt OUTPut LASer INFO OPTion SOURce OUTPut LASer INFO SERial This command queries the value of the laser serial number Syntax SOURce lt slot gt OUTPut LASer INFO SERial SOURce OUTPut LASer INFO WAVelength This command queries the value of the Laser Wavelength setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt OUTPut LASer INFO WAVelength SOURce OUTPut LASER INTERlock This query returns the state of the interlock key switch on the OTS interface module connected to the selected transmitter The key must be on for the laser to operate Syntax SOURce lt slot gt OUTPut LASER INTERIock SOURce SIGNal STANdard This command sets individual OTS9100 modules to the SONET or SDH signal mode The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt Slot gt SIGNal STANdard
6. is always included in the command or query Controlling Responses to Queries You can control the form of responses returned by queries by changing the parameter values of SYSTem HEADers and SYSTem VERBose These two commands control whether the query nodes are returned with the response and if the query nodes are returned whether they are in the long or short form SYSTem HEADers controls the presence of the query nodes and SYSTem VERBose controls the length of these nodes The table below shows the possible combinations of these commands and an example of a query response SYSTem HEADers set to SYSTem VERBose set to Example of a response 1 or ON 1 or ON OUTPUTI TELECOM TYPE OPTICAL 1 or ON 0 or OFF OUTPUTI TEL TYPE OPT 0 or OFF 0 or OFF OPT 0 or OFF 1 or ON OPTICAL OTS9100 User Manual 3 11 Reference Remote Commands Syntax Chaining Commands and Queries You can chain several commands or queries together into a single message To create a chained message first create a command or query add a semicolon and then add more commands or queries and semicolons until you are done Figure 3 3 illustrates a chained message consisting of several commands and queries The single chained message should end in a command or query not a semicolon Responses to any queries in your message are separated by semicolons SOURCE DATA RATE SOURCE DATA PAYLOAD PATTERN First query Second query The respon
7. Operation To start ResultsViewer double click on its icon It can also be started from TekUL by clicking on the View menu and selecting Test Results Opening files on the local computer On the Local computer To open a file locally click on File and select Open Local File A dialog box displays from which the user may select one or more test results files Files with an extension of sum are test results files On the OTS System To open a file on the OTS system the ResultsViewer must be connected to an operating OTS system Once the ResultsViewer is connected click on File and select Open File on Server A dialog box appears with a listing of all available files their creation times and any Test Description text with which the user annotated the test OTS9100 User Manual 2 89 Operating Basics User Interface Connecting to an OTS System Results Viewer uses the same mechanism as the OTS User Interface program TekUI The OTS user manual discusses this procedure in more detail In quick overview click on File and Select Server in ResultsViewer A dialog box displays from which the user can connect to an OTS system or disconnect an existing connection NOTE When Results Viewer is started from TekUI it starts by default connected to the same OTS system as TekUI Viewing results files When a test results file is opened a measurement screen is displayed as shown in Figure 2 65 The screen has three tabs
8. TIM P HP TIM AIS P HP AIS RDI P HP RDI LSS PLM HPPLM B3 REI P HP REI TSE ES Count Ratio ES Count Ratio ES Count Ratio ES Count Ratio ES ES Count Ratio ES Count Ratio ES Count Ratio NOTE C11 through C20 are applicable only for OTS91T2 and OTS91R2 module cards Sonet GR 253 Section Analysis EB A101 A102 A103 A104 A105 A106 A107 A108 OTS9100 User Manual BBE ES SES ESA ESB CSES UAS Count Ratio Count Ratio Count Ratio Count Ratio Count Ratio Count Ratio Count only Count Ratio 2 95 Operating Basics User Interface 2 96 Sonet GR 253 Line Analysis B A201 E A202 BBE A203 ES A204 SES A205 ESA A206 ESB A207 CSES A208 UAS Sonet GR 253 Path Analysis A501 EB A502 BBE A503 ES A504 SES A505 ESA A506 ESB A507 CSES A508 UAS Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Near End Count Far End only Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio F
9. The JO byte is set to the 16 byte string Tektronix BTT The first byte of this string is the CRC B1 contains computed BIP 8 191 ZO bytes are set to OxCC All other Section OverHead SOH set to 00H Line For each channel the first H1 is set to 62H and the first H2 is set to OAH For concatenated structures subsequent H1 s are set to 93H and H2 s are set to FFH filling the remaining pointer values for the structure before repeating first H1 H2 H3 s are all set to OOH B2 contains 192 computed BIP 8 All other Line OverHead LOH set to 00H Path B3 contains computed BIP 8 The J1 byte is set to the 16 byte string Tektronix BTT The first byte of this string is the CRC All other Path OverHead POH set to 00H A 2 OTS9100 User Manual Specifications Table A 2 SDH Default Overhead Regenerator Al and A2 are set to hexadecimal F6H and 28H respectively Section The JO byte is set to the 16 byte string Tektronix BTT The first byte of this string is the CRC B1 contains computed BIP 8 All other Section OverHead SOH set to 00H Multiplexer For each channel the first H1 is set to 6AH and the first H2 is set to OAH Section For concatenated structures subsequent H1 s are set to 93H and H2 s are set to FFH filling the remaining pointer values for the structure before repeating first H1 H2 H3 s are all set to OOH B2 contains 192 comput
10. Optical IN Bn The Optical IN port accepts the receiver s incoming optical signal This input signal must have a wavelength between 1290 nm and 1565 nm and Ng must not exceed 0 dBm of power Rx DATA OU The LED labeled SIG PRES above the OPTICAL IN heading will turn O green when the Optics card detects an incoming signal Flashing Red 50Q indicates an optical loss of signal LOS condition and flashing amber indicates an optical overload condition WARNING The incoming signal must be attenuated to within specified power levels If the signal exceeds 0 dBm damage may occur Rx DATA OUT Rx DATA OUT provides signal interconnection between the system cards This output must be connected to the Rx DATA IN port found on the Receive card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable and DC block provided Rx DATA OUT Rx DATA OUT is a 10Gb s DATA Signal provided for jitter measurement This output must be connected to the 10 Gb s DATA IN port found on the OTS92H1 Clock Receiver Card using the coax cable provided no DC block is necessary Otherwise this output is normally terminated with 50Q OC192 STM64 Rx Figure B 3 Receive Only Front Panel 2 6 OTS9100 User Manual Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions 10Gb s OPTICAL TRANSCEIVER INTERFACE EXTERNAL LASER L7 Thel0Gb s External Laser Transceiver card performs both E O and O E conversions for the OTS system This card contains both an external laser int
11. s text window only o Display Print Events are logged to the application s window and to the default Windows printer Select Events Clicking this button brings up a window shown and discussed below with which the user selects the events to be monitored OTS9100 User Manual 2 99 Operating Basics User Interface Copy to Clipboard Clicking this button copies the list of logged events to the Windows Clipboard from which it may be pasted into another application such as a word processor Copy to File Clicking this button brings up a file selection dialog with which the user specifies the location and name of a text file to receive the list of logged events Copy to Printer Clicking this button copies the list of logged events to the default Windows printer Note that this button is disabled if the currently selected logging mode is Display Print Clear Clicking this button clears the list of logged events Any events that haven t already been copied or printed are thus lost Selecting events to log Clicking the Se ect Events button brings up the Select Events to Monitor display as shown in Figure 2 68 which has one panel for each OTS receiver module Close OTSSIR2 1 Slot 6 Log Events OTSSIR1 1 Slot 2 Log Events T Los T LOF SER J Fas TBI M TIM S I Als L T B2 M ADIL T REIL J Bit Error Figure 2 68 Select Events to Monitor dialog bo
12. 1 6 Amplitude 1 3 23 33 Analog noise 1 1 Analog phase detector 1 3 Analysis 1 1 26 OTS9200 and OTS92S1 User Manual ANSI IEEE Standard 488 2 3 6 APS 1 27 Arranging Windows 2 46 Attaching to the Device to be tested 1 20 B B1 2 18 48 50 51 53 Back plane 4 8 Band limiting 1 1 BITS 1 4 Blanking panel 1 6 7 By Device 1 20 C Chaining Commands 3 12 Clean up process 2 42 Client lockout 2 16 Clock 1 4 19 20 23 Clock Recovery 2 1 7 8 10 Coax cable 1 11 12 14 16 Command Description 3 1 14 Command Format 3 8 Compliance 1 27 2 31 Compliance Title Bar 1 27 Configuring exported data 2 54 Connecting to an OTS system 2 45 Controlling Responses 3 11 Cumulative Tab 1 24 2 28 29 43 45 46 48 51 Current 1 24 25 26 D DACs 1 3 DATA OUT 1 14 DC blocks 1 11 DC signal block 1 11 15 Demodulation Output 2 3 Digital Phase Analysis 1 1 Digitally time stamp signal edges 1 3 Display configuration 2 36 Display Notation 2 35 Distortion 1 11 DPA 1 1 2 3 2 2 5 DSPs 1 3 DWDM 1 4 Index 1 Index E Edge Density Signal EDS 2 4 9 Emergency Startup Disk 1 18 Error Active 2 16 Event Printer 2 55 Exporting test data to other programs 2 46 External reference clock 2 10 11 F FAS 2 18 48 50 51 53 Filter bandwidth 2 23 FPGA 2 2 7 10 G Gain error 1 1 General Rules 3 13 GPS clock 1 4 GR 253 1 2 4 H Hex Block F
13. 50Q DC coupled Voltage Output LOW 0 5V 2 Vol 2 0 1V Voltage Output HIGH 1 3V Voh 0 9V Symmetry 55 45 nominal Description DC coupled 8 KHz output used for monitoring 10 Gb s data output Event Trigger Output Connector SMA External Termination 50Q DC coupled Voltage Output LOW 0 8V Vol 2 0 0V Voltage Output HIGH 3 8V Voh 2 1 7V Pulse Width 25 7 ns nominal Description User specified to be asserted active HIGH for each generated Alarm or Error OTS9100 User Manual A 11 Specifications 622 MHz Trigger Output Connector SMA External Termination 50Q AC coupled Voltage Level 500 mVpp Frequency 622 08 MHz Description Signal provided as a scope trigger for viewing data eye diagrams This sub rate clock is derived from the Line Clock External 155 52 MHz Clock Input Connector SMA Internal Termination 50Q AC coupled Voltage Level 800 mVpp 200 mVpp Frequency 155 52 MHz 150ppm Description Provides a means to synchronize the transmit system to a user supplied reference Transmitter Data Output Electrical Connector SMA External Termination 50Q DC coupled Voltage Output LOW 0 00V Vol 2 0 10V Voltage Output HIGH 0 45V Voh 2 0 60V Description Provides the 10 Gb s data signal Typically connected to TX DATA IN on the Optics card 10 GHz Clock Input Connector SMA Internal Termination 50Q AC coupled Voltage Level 800 mVpp nominal Frequency 9 95328 GHz 1
14. BBE_R Background block error ratio EFS C Error free seconds EFS R Error free seconds ratio ES _C Errored seconds ES_R Errored second ratio SES_C Severely errored seconds SES_R Severely errored second ratio CSES_C Consecutive SES periods UAS_C Unavailable seconds UAS_R Unavailable seconds error ratio SENSe ANALysis G826A MS FAR ALL 3 16 This query returns the values of all of the Far End Multiplexor Section parameters from G 826 analysis of received data The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSe ANALysis G826A MS FAR Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis G826A MS FAR ALL OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis G826A MS NEAR This query returns the value of the specified Near End Multiplexer Section parameter from G 826 analysis of received data Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis G826A MS NEAR lt Enum gt Parameters Description ETIME Elapsed time EB _C Errored blocks EB_R Errored block ratio BBE_C Background block errors BBE_R Background block error ratio EFS C Error free seconds EFS _R Error free seconds ratio ES _C Errored seconds ES_R Errored second ratio SES_C Severely errored seconds SES _R Severely errored second ratio CSES_C Consecutive SES periods UAS_C Unavailable seconds UAS_R Unavailable seconds error ratio SENSe ANALysis G826A MS NEAR ALL This query returns the values of all of the Near End Multip
15. Count Ratio A201 EB 0 0 00 0 0 00 2 92 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface A202 BBE 0 0 00 0 0 00 A203 ES 0 0 00 0 0 00 A204 SES 0 0 00 0 0 00 A205 ESA 0 0 00 0 0 00 A206 ESB 0 0 00 0 0 00 T2 Param Count Count A207 CSES 0 0 T2 Param Count Ratio Count Ratio A208 UAS 0 0 00 0 0 00 Tl Sonet GR 253 Analysis Path Near end Far end T2 Param Count Ratio Count Ratio A501 EB 0 0 00 0 0 00 A502 BBE 0 0 00 0 0 00 A503 ES 0 0 00 0 0 00 A504 SES 0 0 00 0 0 00 A505 ESA 0 0 00 0 0 00 A506 ESB 0 0 00 0 0 00 T2 Param Count Count A507 CSES 0 0 T2 Param Count Ratio Count Ratio A508 UAS 0 0 00 0 0 00 T1 SDH G 826 Analysis Regenerator Section T2 Param Count Ratio A301 EB 0 0 00 A302 BBE 0 0 00 A303 ES 4 1 00 A304 SES 4 1 00 T2 Param Count A305 CSES 1 T2 Param Count Ratio A306 UAS 0 0 00 Tl SDH G 826 Analysis Multiplex Section Near end Far end T2 Param Count Ratio Count Ratio A401 EB 0 0 00 0 0 00 A402 BBE 0 0 00 0 0 00 A403 ES 0 0 00 0 0 00 A404 SES 0 0 00 0 0 00 T2 Param Count Count A405 CSES 0 0 T2 Param Count Ratio Count Ratio A406 UAS 0 0 00 0 0 00 Tl SDH G 826 Analysis Path Near end Far end T2 Param Count
16. LF Line feed LF character 0x0A an optional preceding CR is ignored CR Carriage return CR character 0x0D an optional preceding LF is ignored SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A TXTERM This command controls for the COM2 serial port the characters the OTS 9000 system sends at the end of a query response The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A TXTERM lt SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A TXTERM lt Enum gt Parameters Description LF Line feed LF character Ox0A CR Carriage return CR character Ox0D CRLF CR followed by LF LFCR LF followed by CR SYSTem CONFig MODule SERIAL This query accepts a module slot number between 1 and 16 and returns a string identifying the Tektronix module card serial number as a quoted string Syntax SYSTem CONFig MODule SERIAL lt NR1 gt OTS9100 User Manual 3 75 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem CONFig MODule TY PE This query accepts a module slot number between 1 and 16 and returns a string identifying the Tektronix module in the specified slot If the slot specified does not contain an OTS system this query returns the string Non Tek device or empty slot Syntax SYSTem CONFig MODule TYPE lt NR1 gt SYSTem CONFig MODule VARIANT This query accepts a module slot number between 1 and 16 and returns the module variant as a decimal number or 0 if there is no variant information Variant
17. Line RDI Path AIS Pat RDI Path RDI Payload Path RDI Server Path RDI Connectivity Path loss of pointer SOURce INSert IP ANOMaly MODE This command specifies how IP anomalies are inserted The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSert IP ANOMaly MODE SOURce lt slot gt INSert IP ANOMaly MODE lt Parameter gt Parameters NONE SINGle CONTinuous OTS9100 User Manual Description IP anomaly insertion is disabled A single IP anomaly is inserted IP anomalies are inserted continuously at the programmed rate 3 61 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce INSert IP ANOMaly RATE This command sets the rate at which continuously generated IP anomalies are inserted The query form returns the current value Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSert IP ANOMaly RATE SOURce lt slot gt INSert IP ANOMaly RATE lt NR3 gt SOURce INSert IP ANOMaly RATE RANGe This query returns the minimum and maximum rate values for the specified IP anomaly type The values returned are formatted as NR3 parameters Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSert IP ANOMaly RATE RANGe lt Parameter gt Parameters Description NONE No anomaly is selected FCS HDLC frame check sequence errors PAYLoad IP payload errors CRC IP header check sum errors SOURce INSert IP ANOMaly TYPE This command selects the type of IP anomaly inserted The query form returns the current selection Syntax
18. N f 50 eee Rx F SYNC OUT ii OUT a 4 or 6 coax cable r _ Rx DATA OS e 8 coax cable for OTS9200 interconnection Tx DATA IN LS 6 coax cable amp F 502 6 coax cable QC192 oc192 STM64 STNA Rx Tx RECEIVE Rx CLOCK OUT 0C192 0C192 STM64 STM64 TRANSMIT CLK TRIG Tektronix OTS962Z1 EU MODULE OK EXT AM INPUT LASER LOCKOUT Al REMOTE INTERLOCK A OPTICAL OUT AVOID A iiie TOBEAM AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED FROM APERTURE CLASS Illb LASER PRODUCT 21 Fiber Optics Cable customer provided 4 coax cable SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3 SLOT 4 Any Available Slot G 2 OTS9100 User Manual INDEX 1 128MB RAM Upgrade 1 7 155Mb s IN 2 11 155MHz Clock Out 2 10 10 GHz Jitter 1 1 10Gb s DATA IN 1 12 16 2 7 10Gb s Jitter 1 2 11 13 15 17 19 10Gb s Jitter Testing 1 11 10GHz CLOCK IN 1 11 12 16 2 2 10GHz CLOCK OUT 1 11 12 16 10GHz JITTER CLOCK OUT 1 12 2 9 2 2 5GHz Jitter A Clock Out 2 7 2 5GHz Jitter B Clock Out 2 7 2 5 Jitter Clock In connector 1 19 2 9 2 5Gbs Jitter 1 2 2 5GHz Jitter 1 1 2 5GHz JITTER A CLOCK OUT 1 12 14 2 5GHz JITTER CLOCK IN 1 12 2 5 10MHz 2Mb s IN 2 11 4 4 25 coaxial cable 1 6 6 622MHz Clock Out 2 5 6 25 coaxial cable 1 6 8 8 25 coaxial cable 1 6 A Abbreviating commands 3 11 ADCs 1 3 Air diverter
19. OTS91R1 i o N O Gb s Px Signal Standard SONET e Signal Source Internal v mae Timing Source Internal v 1 Gh s Rx 1 A Trigger Output Anomaly Defect 5 7 Active Channel s OTS91T1 0 Gb s Tx 1 Signal Structure STS 3c M 2 Click on ZT Test Pattem PRBS 2 23 1 Inverted ITU 0 151 z the icon OTS91T3 Active Channel 1 Set Channel 10 Gh s Tx 1 OTS32R1 Jitter SPE VC3 Stuff Column Control Analyzer 1 r nB Signal Monitor Background Channels Test Control i STS 3c d Sianal Structure r Note Scroll bars at the bottom and to the right hand side of the Setup Window allow the user to scroll when menu information extends beyond the window frame OTS9100 User Manual 2 25 Operating Basics User Interface Transmitter Signal 2 26 The Signal Property menu of the Transmitter setup as shown in Figure 2 10 provides the controls for selecting the Signal setup Transport overhead Path overhead Error insertion K1 K2 Decode IP payload and IP error In addition the signal structure and test pattern for both the active channels and the background channels are configured on this setup menu Each of the selections available is described in more detail in the following sections Setup OTS91T3 10 Gbis Tx 1 1 i dit Stream Index E Ed i Error Selection Current Error Insertion Emertype None H Error Type None Apply Changes Figure
20. Pause Edit OTS91R1 10 Gb s Rx 1 Description Test State Complete TestMode Continuous Elapsed Time Os Start Pause zz Figure 2 40 Test Control Summary menu 2 64 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Measurements Menu When Measurements is selected from the Navigation window the Measurements menu is displayed The Measurements menu provides separate configuration control over each receiver through associated icons If an Rx icon is clicked the Receiver signal monitor menu is displayed This menu contains separate menu screens each selected by a tab These tabs each display an aspect of the Receiver Measurement function Receiver Real Time The Real Time menu has four tab selections provided as property page display choices Real Time Cumulative History and IP Measurements The real time display menu provides the ability to view the errored seconds error counts and error ratios for each error condition monitored during the last n seconds up to sixty There is a Section and Line View a Path View and a Selected View If Selected is chosen a window is displayed which allow the user to select four error measurements System View Device Window Help IE e PAENT E IE on of AllLasers gt IR e m m Baltes z Measurements OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 ae Clear History 4 Signal Monitor Vin cumulative History IP Measurements Test Control Display
21. Ratio Count Ratio A601 EB 0 0 00 0 0 00 A602 BBE 0 0 00 0 0 00 A603 ES 0 0 00 0 0 00 OTS9100 User Manual 2 93 Operating Basics User Interface A604 SES 0 0 00 0 0 00 T2 Param Count Count A605 CSES 0 0 T2 Param Count Ratio Count Ratio A606 UAS 0 0 00 0 0 00 Tl History Data T2 Resolution SampleCount H1 1 4 T2 Time Day Clock LOS LOF OOF TIM AIS RDI BI B2 FAS REI TIM p H2 0 0 17 00 02 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 H2 1 0 17 00 03 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 H2 2 0 17 00 04 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 H2 3 0 17 00 05 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 H3 Pause 00 00 07 H2 4 0 17 00 13 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 94 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Record type codes Each record appears as one line of text If the report options include Record Type Codes the first entry in each record is a code indicating the type of that record Record types are General T1 T2 7 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 Cumulative results c01 C02 C03 C04 C05 C06 C07 C08 c09 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C18 C19 C20 Text Section heading Text Column headings Summary report Test file info File name Test start time Test end time Test elapsed time not including pauses Test description text LOS LOF OOF TIM S RS TIM AIS L MS AIS RDI L MS RDI B1 FAS B2 REI L MS REI
22. Receiver Setup Signal menu Signal Standard Signal Standard selects the operating mode of the receiver To select either SONET or SDH mode click on the pull down menu and select the desired operating mode The operating mode may also be selected via the menu bar Click on System Signal Standard and select either Set to SONET or Set to SDH NOTE If the signal standard is selected via the menu bar View gt Options the signal standard is set for all devices in the system OTS9100 User Manual 2 47 Operating Basics User Interface 2 48 BERT Mode For some modules there is a third option available from the Signal Standard menu the BERT mode With this mode the OTS9100 becomes a BERT generator The Test Pattern selection for the active channel is the only valid selection on the transmitter signal setup page when BERT mode is selected When the signal standard is returned to either SONET or SDH mode the settings will return to the current selections in the setup menus Most LED indicators are also invalidated by the BERT mode The only valid LEDs are Signal Present TSE and LSS Signal Structure Signal structure allows the user to choose the mapping structure of the received signal The mapping structures provided are listed in the table below As shown the structures all provide concatenated structures SONET SDH 1 x STS 192c 1 x VC4 64c 4 x STS 48c 2 x VC4 16c 16 x STS 12c 16 x VC4 4c 64 x
23. SOURce lt slot gt INSert IP ANOMaly TYPE SOURce lt slot gt INSert IP ANOMaly TYPE lt Parameter gt Parameters Description NONE No anomaly is selected FCS HDLC frame check sequence errors PAYLoad IP payload errors CRC IP header check sum errors SOURce MEASure HDLC BY Tes This query returns the number of HDLC bytes transmitted with good FCS Syntax SOURce lt slot gt MEASure HDLC BYTes 3 62 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce MEA Sure HDLC FRAMes This query returns the value of the specified result parameter Syntax SOURce lt slot gt MEASure HDLC FRAMes lt Parameter gt Parameters Description GPCS Count of HDLC frames transmitted with good FCS BFCS Count of HDLC frames transmitted with bad FCS SOURce MEASure HDLC FRAMes ALL This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SOURce MEASure HDLC FRAMes Syntax SOURce lt slot gt MEASure HDLC FRAMes ALL SOURce MEASure IP PACKets This query returns the value of the specified result parameter Syntax SOURce lt slot gt MEASure IP PACKets lt Parameter gt Parameters Description TOTal Total count of transmitted IP packets GOOD Count of good transmitted IP packets BAD Count of IP packets transmitted without errors SOURce MEASure IP PACKets ALL This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SOURce MEASure IP PACKets Syntax SOURce lt slot gt MEASure IP PACKets ALL
24. Signal Name Rx Data Out 10GHz s Data In Connector SMA Voltage Level 0 70 Vpp typical Description Electrical data signal Connect Rx DATA OUT Optics card to 10GHz s DATA IN Jitter Clock Receive Card with Tektronix supplied cable accessories SMA SMA coax Otherwise terminate Rx DATA OUT with 50Q Signal Name Rx Clock Out Rx Clock In Connector SMA Voltage Level 0 8Vpp typical Description Clock signal Connect Rx CLK OUT Receive card to Rx CLK IN Sync card with Tektronix supplied cable accessory SMA SMA coax OTS9100 User Manual A 15 Specifications Certifications and Compliance Laser Safety The lasers in the OTS9100 module comply with the following U S Class IIIb per 21 CFR 1040 European Class 3A per IEC 60825 1 CE Mark Compliance EMC Compliance Directive OTS9100 Series 10 Gb s SONET SDH Test Module using the OTS9000 Optical Test System meets the essential requirements per Article 10 of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility using the Technical Construction File TCF Route Competent Body issuing Certificate of Conformity TUV Product Service Listing of Harmonized Standards applied EN 55022 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN 61000 3 2 Quasi stationary Current Harmonics EN 61326 1997 Immunity IEC 1000 4 2 ESD Immunity Performance Criterion B IEC 1000 4 3 Radiated Immunity Performance Criterion A IEC 1000 4 4 EFT Burst Immunity Performance Criteri
25. Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe TYPE SOURce lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe TYPE lt Enum gt Parameters Description L1B Constant 8 bit data L16B A repeating sequence of 16 bytes 0 filled with CRC LI6FREE A repeating sequence of 16 bytes arbitrary format L64B A repeating sequence of 64 bytes space filled with CR LF L64FREE A repeating sequence of 64 bytes arbitrary format OTS9100 User Manual 3 55 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA SECTion TRACe VALUe This command sets the data byte values transmitted in the Section Trace JO byte of the Transport Overhead The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE 488 data block The query form returns the current values Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe VALUe SOURce lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe VALUe lt Block gt lt SOURce DATA SECTion TRACe VALUe STRIng This command sets the data byte values transmitted in the Section Trace JO byte of the Transport Overhead The data byte values are specified as an ASCII string The query form returns the current values Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe VALUe STRIng SOURce lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe VALUe STRIng lt String gt SOURce DATA SOURce This command sets the source of the data at the output of the OTS 9000 transmitter The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA SOURce SOURce lt slot gt DATA SOURce lt Enu
26. WARNING Always avoid exposure to the laser beam Before power INTERLOCK INTERLOCK is applied to the OTS9100 system be sure that all laser outputs are either covered with the screw cap provided or connected to the appropriate circuit 50Q LASER ga OC192 STM64 OC192 STM64 1310nm 1550nm Tx Tx Figure B 2 Transmitter Front Panels 2 4 OTS9100 User Manual Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions Tx Data IN Tx Data Input allows electrical data signals to be applied to the optical transmitter This input must be connected to the Tx Data Out port found on the OTS91Tn Transmitter card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable provided Laser Lockout Remote Interlock REMOTE INTERLOCK is a bantam plug normally closed connection internally wired in series with the laser lockout key switch It can be used with additional hardware to disable the laser output NOTE If this connection is used the ferrite bead provided with the module must be attached to the remote interlock cable for lower emissions and CE mark conformance Install the bead close to the end of the cable connected to the Optics card Laser LOCKOUT is a safety device The key switch disables the laser output when it is turned to the open lock position The laser output can only be turned on when the key is in the closed lock position NOTE The laser output cannot be enabled unless The Laser Lockout key switch i
27. criteria have been satisfied Disabling the revisit interval flag will keep the system from deleting any files while maintaining user selected criteria NOTE The system requires a single numeric base 10 parameter flags are described as a bit field the user must convert from the bit field or hex to a numeric integer Flags are cumulative Sending the value of zero disables all criteria Syntax SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts ENABle SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUlts ENABle lt NR1 gt Bit Value Criteria affected 0x1 Enables 1 or disables 0 deletion based on number of files Set by the COUNt command 0x2 Enables 1 or disables 0 deletion based on total consumed space of files Set by the TOTAIsize command 0x4 Enables 1 or disables 0 deletion based on percentage of volume consumed Set by the PERcent command 0x8 Enables 1 or disables 0 deletion based on age of files delta Set by the AGE command 0x10 Enables 1 or disables 0 the revisit interval Set by the INTErval command SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUlts INTErval This command sets the minimum amount of time the system waits between polling file deletion criteria If any deletion criteria have been met such as number of files deletion will begin If no criteria are met no deletion will take place until the next interval The query form returns the current setting NOTE Units for INTErval are usec Settings of less than 30000usec 30sec should be avoided since constant re
28. default view OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Navigation Window The Navigation window provides the ability to set up monitor and test the module and to view the test results The Navigation window can be displayed via two methods by category or by device Set the display window by selecting View gt Options from the File Menu bar A choice of by Category or By Device is provided under the Navigation Mode column in this window The Navigation window contains categories representing Setup D Signal Horiter Signal Monitor Test control Measurements Analysis APS measurement and Compliance It displays each of the OTS cards loaded in the system with an associated device icon Each category m Test Control provides additional configuration and control options for the selected 731 OTS card F Measurements When selected each Category bar moves to the top of the Navigation window reflecting the current selection If a new icon is not selected e from the new navigation view the menu will still reflect the previous Analyzer 1 Navigation window selection For example the Navigation window may show the Signal Monitor icons when the currently selected o 0759251 r Analysis menu is actually Setup OTS91T2 10Gb s Tx 1 pea aire The Navigation bar is adaptive Entries are added depending on the ceca system configuration When the server connection is established the m ARIA
29. lt Enum gt Parameters Description NONE No anomaly is selected B1BIP B1 parity errors B2BIP B2 parity errors B3BIP B3 parity errors REI Line REI errors REI_P Path REI errors PATTern Pattern bit errors RANDom Errors in randomly selected framing overhead and payload bits BIT_SPE Errors in randomly selected SPE bits SONET mode only BIT_VC Errors in randomly selected VC bit SDH mode only OTS9100 User Manual 3 59 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce INSErt DEFEct MODE This command specifies how defects are inserted The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt DEFEct MODE SOURce lt slot gt INSErt DEFEct MODE lt Enum gt Parameters NONE BURSt CONTinuous Description Defect insertion is disabled A defect condition is asserted for a programmed time A defect condition is asserted continously SOURce INSErt DEFEct STATe This query returns the current state of defect insertion Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt DEFEct STATe Parameters Description INACT Defect anomaly insertion is inactive SING_INACT One time defect anomaly insertion is inactive SING_DWELL One time defect anomaly insertion is active BRST_INACT Burst defect anomaly insertion is inactive BRST_ACT Burst defect anomaly insertion is active between bursts BRST_DWELL Burst defect anomaly insertion is active CONT_INACT Continuous defect anomaly insertion is inactive CONT_ACT Contin
30. none All parameters 0 hex 0 SENSe STATus LEDS HEXadecimal This query is an alternative form of SENSe STATus LEDS It returns a time value and four integer values that represent the status conditions listed in the table above The parameters are returned as hexadecimal base 16 numbers Each condition appears as a bit value in one of the four parameter values returned the particular parameter and bit value appears in the table above Note that the high order eight bits of each parameter identify the parameter in question and do not represent LED status conditions The optional time parameter specifies the earliest time of interest Syntax SENSe lt slot gt STATus LEDS HEXadecimal lt NR1 gt SENSe STATus LEDS NUMEric 3 42 This query is an alternative form of SENSe STATus LEDS It returns a time value and four integer values that represent the status conditions listed in the table above The parameters are returned as decimal numbers Each condition appears as a bit value in one of the four parameter values returned the particular parameter and bit value appears in the table above Note that the high order eight bits of each parameter identify the parameter in question and do not represent LED status conditions The optional time parameter specifies the earliest time of interest Syntax SENSe lt slot gt STATus LEDS NUMEric lt NR1 gt OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe
31. 1 Bridged 2 Bridged and Switched 3 Not Used Span Ext TR Ring 4 Unidirectional 5 Bidirectional 6 RDI L 7 AIS L OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Transmitter IP Payload The new Packet Over SONET POS feature characterizes physical layer performance of SONET and SDH equipment by generating and measuring IP traffic Specifically the POS feature provides the ability to determine physical layer operating limits based on IP QoS For instance the sensitivity of IP routers to received laser power optical jitter tolerace degraded Signal to noise and frequency offset can be determined using IP measurements The principle benefit of this additional feature is confidence that IP QoS is not preturbed by conforming physical layer degradations The POS feature is not intended to be a comprehensive IP QoS tester but to enhance physical layer testing Setup OTSS1T3 10 Gb s Txt 1 Signal Transport Overhead Path Overhead Error Insertion K1 K2 Decode i IP Error Insertion r Traffic r IP Header eo Version o a Type of service one Stream Index E Edit EREE 1496 IP Setup Identification 0 POS Scrambling on o x F Ea IP Payload JPRas2 311 tsi Fragment offset o 0 Time to Live o a Protocol a p e E IPSource Addr 192 168 45 1 IP Dest Addr i22 168 53 1 Edit IP Header Figure 2 26 IP Header Menu The IP Payload menu consists o
32. 1 in the STM 1 Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA TOH STM1A ALL SENSe DATA TOH STSIA ALL 3 32 This query returns a block of data representing the Transport Overhead data from an STS 1 in the received signal There are 27 bytes in the block returned These correspond to the overhead bytes A1 A2 JO B1 E1 F1 D1 D3 H1 H3 B2 K1 K2 D4 012 S1 Z2 E2 Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA TOH STS1A ALL lt NR1 gt OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe INPUt THREshold This command sets the receiver input offset threshold value in millivolts for the OTS receiver The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt INPUt THREshold SENSe lt slot gt INPUt THREshold lt NR1 gt SENSe INPut THReshold LOS This command sets the LOS threshold value The query form returns the currently active setting for the LOS threshold Syntax SENSe lt slot gt INPut THReshold LOS SENSe lt slot gt INPut THReshold LOS lt NR1 gt SENSe MEASure APSTime CONDition This command sets the condition tested for APS switch time measurement The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure APSTime CONDition SENSe lt slot gt MEASure APSTime CONDition lt Enum gt Parameters Description LOS Loss of Signal OOF Severely Errored Frame Out of Frame B1BIP B1 errors B2BIP B2 errors B3BIP B3 errors BIT Bit payload errors AIS_L Lin
33. 10 Gb s Rx 1 Type None X None OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 Insertion Cor CJ OTST 10 Gh s Tx 1 Insert Sing Apply Anomaly Setup Changes Start Continuous Insert B2 anomalies into 1st B2 Only C 1st B2 in each STS n structure C All OTSS1T3 10 Gb s Tx 1 Defect Insertion Defect Insertion Setup Current Defect li Type None X None c OTS92R1 Jitter Analyzer 1 i Signal Monitor insertion Cor ce Figure 2 21 Transmitter Error Insertion menu The menu is broken into two separate sections Anomaly Insertion provides the ability to inject a single anomaly or continuously inject at a selected rate Defect Insertion provides the ability to inject a defect as a single burst or in continuous insertion OTS9100 User Manual 2 37 Operating Basics User Interface Anomaly Insertion 2 38 Setup OTS91T3 10 Gbis Tx 1 Signal Transport Overhead Path Overhead Error Insertion K1 K2 Decode IP Payload IP Error Insertion Anomaly Insertion Anomaly Insertion Setup Current Anomaly Type REI P REI P Rate Rate 4 257 x 107 4 Insertion Cor Insert Sing Random Bit Stop Inserti Insert B2 a Taa pi SPE ont heron T_TstBZin each STS n structure All Figure 2 22 Anomaly Insertion of the Error Insertion menu The anomaly insertion section of the error insertion menu as shown in Figure 2 22 provides all controls for inserti
34. 2 10 Transmitter Setup Signal menu Signal Standard Signal Standard selects the operating mode of the transmitter To select either SONET or SDH mode click on the pull down menu and select the desired operating mode The operating mode may also be selected via the menu bar Click on System Signal Standard and select either Set to SONET or Set to SDH NOTE If the signal standard is selected via the menu bar View gt Options the signal standard is set for all devices in the system OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface BERT Mode For some modules a third option is available from the Signal Standard menu the BERT mode With this mode the OTS9100 becomes a BERT generator The Test Pattern selection for the active channel is the only valid selection on the transmitter signal setup page when BERT mode is selected When the signal standard is returned to either SONET or SDH mode the settings will return to the last settings used Most LED indicators are invalidated by the BERT mode The only valid active LEDs are Signal Present TSE and LSS Signal Source Signal Source selects the data source used as the output signal The modes available are Internal mode and Through mode gt Internal Mode Internal mode provides an internally generated 9 95238 Gb s signal with the data in a PN7 scrambled NRZ format gt Through Mode If using through mode the user has the choice of passing a 9 95238 GHz sig
35. 2 51 Splitters 1 11 Status Window 2 18 Stratum 3 internal crystal oscillator 1 4 Synchronization 1 1 4 Synchronization external clocks 1 4 System View 2 38 System Menu 2 41 Syntax 3 1 6 14 to 55 T Tektronix 1 1 6 18 Tektronix Meausrement data 2 41 Terminator Cap 1 6 Test Active 2 16 TEST Control 1 26 2 14 15 25 26 27 Test mode 2 26 Through mode 1 10 Index 3 Index Time Axis 2 30 31 Timing Source 2 22 Time stamps 1 3 Title bar 2 21 36 45 Tolerance 1 27 31 33 Toolbar 2 15 Transfer 1 27 34 Transmitter 2 21 22 24 Transmitter Configuration 1 19 Tx DATA OUT 1 11 15 Transmitter icon 2 21 Index 4 U Upper Trace Parameters 1 26 2 30 User interface 1 2 4 18 User defined 2 32 2 13 to 19 21 35 36 39 40 41 43 55 V View Options 2 35 Viewing Results Files 2 45 W Windowed 1 24 25 Windows 2000 1 2 4 6 7 13 17 18 40 46 55 to 57 OTS9200 and OTS92S1 User Manual
36. 22 23 24 25 26 27 Click the radio button for Continuous test mode and then click OK to close the dialog box Use the key provided to disable the laser lockout at the front of the Optical card On the Laser Control bar select the OTS91T3 10Gb s Tx 1 laser and click On On the Optics module card front panel verify the following e the Optical Out LED lights green e the Sig Pres LED under Optical IN lights green On the Test Control bar click the start button to begin a test On the front panel of the Receive module card verify that the LOS DEFECT and ANOMALY LEDs are all off Verify that the Status window has no lit error indicators except the green Signal Present indicator In the Navigation window click the Setup bar and select the OTS91T3 10Gb s Tx 1 icon Select the Error Insertion tab Under Anomaly Insertion Setup click the pull down menu for Type and select B1 BIP Click Apply Anomaly Setup Changes Click Insert Single three times to insert three single errors Verify that the Anomaly LED on the Receive front panel flashes for each B1 injected In the Status window the red B1 indicator should flash for each B1 injected and the yellow B1 indicator should remain lit In the Navigation window click Measurements and select the OTS91T3 10Gb s Rx 1 icon Click on the Cumulative tab Verify that the B1 line has data entered On the Test Control bar click the Stop Test button On th
37. L REI REI L RS Rx SCPI SDH SES SONET SPE STS STS N TIM TOH TU TUG Tx UAS VC VT Line Remote Alarm Indication Remote Defect Indication Line Remote Defect Indication Remote Error Indication Line Remote Error Indication Regenerator Section Receiver Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Severely Errored Second Synchronous Optical Network Synchronous Payload Envelope Synchronous Transport Signal Synchronous Transport Signal level N Trace Identifier Mismatch Transport Overhead Tributary Unit Tributary Unit Group Transmitter Unavailable Second Virtual Container Virtual Tributary OTS9100 User Manual Module Card Replacement Replacement parts are available from or through your local Tektronix Inc service center or representative For further information or module replacement inquiries may be directed to the Service Call Center at 800 833 9200 The OTS9100 is serviced by module replacement Ifa faulty module card is detected use the following table to determine the necessary replacement card part number Please have this number available when inquiring with your Tektronix representative Tektronix Part Number Description 672 1609 00 OTS91C1 Clock Trig card 672 1688 00 OTS91C3 Clock Trig card 672 1606 00 OTS91L1 Tx Rx Optics card 672 1608 00 OTS91L2 Tx Optics card 672 1607 00 OTS91L3 Rx Optics card 67
38. MEASure PATH WINDow ALL 3 38 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe MEASure SECTion CUMUlative This query returns the value of the specified result parameter for the most recent test Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure SECTion CUMUlative lt Enum gt Parameters Description B1_C B1 errors B1_ES B1 errored seconds B1_ER B1 error ratio FAS_C Framing errors FAS_ES Framing errored seconds FAS_ER Framing error ratio LOS_ES Loss of signal errored seconds LOF_ES Loss of frame errored seconds OOF_ES Out of frame errored seconds RSTIM_ES RS trace mismatch errored seconds SENSe MEASure SECTion CUMUlative ALL This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SENSE MEASURE SECTION CUMULATIVE query The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSE MEASURE SECTION CUMULATIVE Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure SECTion CUMUlative ALL SENSe MEASure SECTion WINDow This query returns the value of the specified result parameter as measured during the most recent N seconds The duration N of the measurement window is set by the SENSE MEASURE WINDOW SIZE command Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure SECTion WINDow lt Enum gt Parameters Description B1_C B1 errors B1_ES B1 errored seconds B1_ER B1 error ratio FAS_C Framing errors FAS_ES Framing errored seconds FAS_ER Framing error ratio LOS_ES Loss of signal errored seconds L
39. Mode The parameter is a numeric value in which each bit enables retransmission of received data for one specific path overhead field The bit values are shown under SOURce DATA PATH OVERhead PASSthru The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH OVERhead PASSthru ALL SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH OVERhead PASSthru ALL lt NR1 gt SOURce DATA PATH TRACe This command sets the data sequence length and data byte values transmitted in the Path Trace J1 byte of the Path Overhead The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE 488 data block The query form returns the current settings Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe lt Enum gt lt Block gt Parameters Description L1B Constant 8 bit data L16B A repeating sequence of 16 bytes 0 filled with CRC LI6FREE A repeating sequence of 16 bytes arbitrary format L64B A repeating sequence of 64 bytes space filled with CR LF L64FREE A repeating sequence of 64 bytes arbitrary format SOURce DATA PATH TRACe TY PE This command sets the data sequence length transmitted in the Path J1 byte of the Path Overhead The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe T YPE SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe TYPE lt Enum gt Parameters Description L1B Constant 8 bit data L16B A repeating sequence of 16 bytes 0 filled with CRC LI6FREE A repeating sequence of 16 byte
40. Monitor OTS91R2 10 Gbis Rx 1 Transport Overhead Path Overhead K1 K2 Decode Payload K1 K2 Bytes OTS91R1 10 Gb s Rx 1 K1 EF Hex Request 14 Forced Switch 1110 1111 Binary Request Channel 15 OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 FO Hex Bridged Channel 15 1111 0000 Binary Architecture 0 1 1 Mode 0 Idle OTS93R1 2 5 Gb s Receiver cal Figure 2 36 Signal Monitor K1 K2 Decode 2 60 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Receiver Payload The Payload signal monitor screen as shown in Figure 2 37 provides a graphical representation of the signal structure of the system The system analyzes the incoming signal and displays the configuration Any of the structures can be clicked and the identifying information for that channel is displayed Signal Monitor OTS91R1 10 Gb s Px 1 OTS91R2 10 Gh s Rx 1 OTS93R1 2 5 Gb s Receiver 1 Test Control E Signal Monitor OTS91R2 10 Gbis Rx 1 Transport Overhead Path Overhead K1 K2 Decode Payload m Signal structure 192 x STS 1 m Receiver Signal Structure STS 3c Active Channel 1 Receiver structure channel are not valid for this signal Figure 2 37 Signal Monitor Payload OTS9100 User Manual 2 61 Operating Basics User Interface Test Control Menu When Test Control is selected from the Navigation window the Test Control menu is displayed
41. NO DATA Switch Time 0 00 Switch Time Display Units C Sec mSec C Frames Bit Error Conditions Found z E 7 MTER Erros Test L al Eek ass PE ee iene se eet Figure 2 52 APS Measurements menu The Automatic Protection Switching APS duration counter test verifies that the system performs APS switching in an expected manner There are three parameters that require setup before the test is activated To set click the Edit Test Parameters button to display the Set APS Test Parameters dialog box as shown in Figure 2 53 2 78 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface APS Meas OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 r Test Parameters Condition Tested SEF Test Time Limit 100 msec Switch Time Threshold 50 msec Fait Test Parameters l Set APS Test Parameters x Sta Condition Tested SEF td Test Ref i Test Time Limit 0 60000 msec 100 Test Re Switch Time Threshold 0 60000 msec o Switch Switch mE Fre Conditions Found a fa Figure 2 53 Set APS Test Parameters dialog box The Condition Tested selects the condition that triggers an APS switch The test will not begin until this condition occurs and it will end when the last condition occurs The conditions available are SEF OOF LOS B1 B2 B3 TSE AIS L AIS P RDI L and RDI P and Optical LOS only available if using an OTS91L4 OTS91L6 or OTS91L7 Optical card The Test Time Limit defines the time the test will run AFTER the
42. Offset 0 000 ppm Sync Setup EEUU Figure 2 32 Setup Summary menu OTS9100 User Manual 2 55 Operating Basics User Interface Signal Monitor Menus When Signal Monitor is selected from the Navigation window icons for all loaded Receiver modules are displayed The Signal Monitor menu provides separate configuration control over each receiver by these individual icons If an Rx icon is clicked the Receiver signal monitor menu is displayed This menu contains four separate menu screens each selected by a tab These tabs Transport Overhead Path Overhead K1 K2 Decode and Payload each display an aspect of the Signal Monitor function Receiver Transport Overhead 2 56 The transport overhead menu as shown in Figure 2 33 displays the current activity of the transport overhead as monitored by the selected receiver The Section Trace JO and the S1 Synchronization Status provide additional information received Setup a Signal Monitor OTS91R1 10 Gbis Rx 1 Signal Monitor STS 3 Transport Overhead SONET a i Channel 1 Pause Update OTSSIRI biii Al DE Al Fo Aifa A2 DF A2 FA A215 JO Eo FB 16 B1 TEI FC 7 BIDEZ FD 18 Fl E3 FE 19 OTS91R2 10 Ge s Ps Fi D1 E4 FF 1A D2 E5 00 1B D3 E6 01 1c H1 E7 H102 11D H2 E8 H2 03 H2 1E H3 E9 H3 04 H3 1F B2 EA B205 _ B2 20 K1 EB K106 K1 21 K2 EC K2 07 K2 22 OTS93R1 2 5 f Gb s Receiver D4 ED 08 23 D5 EE 09 24 D6
43. Slot 2 0TS91R2 1 a Section and Line Seconds fro a aa C Path C Selected Slot 2 OTSSIR2 1 OTSSIRT Gb s r Measurement Results Last 10 Seconds x Error Errored Seconds Error Counts Error Ratios LOS 0TS91R2 10 Gb s LOF Rx 1 SEF z 0 000e 000 OTS91T3 10 Gb s B1 0 000e 000 Tx OTS92A1 Jitter I 0 000e 000 Analyzer 1 m 0 000e 000 OTS93A1 2 5 Gb s Receiver 1 APS Meas Compliance LOCKOUT Pga Eon a Laser Optical pei areca agor E n reir OFF Dvertoad Figure 2 41 Real Time menu Section and Line display OTS9100 User Manual 2 65 Operating Basics User Interface Figure 2 42 Real Time menu Selected display 2 66 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Receiver Cumulative The cumulative menu has two selections on the top for Display choices Section and Line and Path The cumulative display menu provides a summary of the errored seconds error counts and error ratios for each error condition monitored during the test The results are accumulated while the test is in progress and are cleared when a new test begins The measurements shown reflect the display choice as shown in Figures 2 44 and 2 45 Measurements OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 Real Time Cumulative History IP Measurements Display l amp Section and Line Path Test Complete Elapsed Time 0s r Measure
44. TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Table of Contents Table of Contents General Safety SUMMALSY cceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseeaaeees v Pretace isar nder ced Rade ite daaa aai t aada aiee aa ar e aaie aa eden ix Getting Started PFOCUCt Description e asee ee ee teat voice caneeerteseteatendecncvessess dean cecoorereeteevanconaveeexeesendards 1 1 OTS9100 Features and Capabilities 2 0 0 0 cececeecccceceeeeeceececeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeesessnaeess 1 2 ACCESSONICS i Aiia edd arate adai i een aiani need easily ideal 1 4 First Time Operation sits c ccciiscecteatcieceecesccetadeeteedevetsasaelideeeersteseiseladaneessttvearculceaeeeiedens 1 6 OPS9 100 Installation sj sasen ee decease sede obs 1 6 Removing OITS Cards moar ATE 1 7 Slot Positioning of OTS Carde setena Ta A EE TAE 1 8 Module Interconnection cceccececceceeeeeeeceecaeceeeeeeesenacaeceeeeeseeeccueaeeeeeeesetsnnieeeees 1 10 Power On and Software Initialization ccccecceceeeeeeececceeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeees 1 11 Module Quick Check sisesee cinta tenets sete deed eg eaea aiaia eerie cece 1 12 Emergency Startup DISK eara ennaa a a a aia 1 14 Shutdown and Power Offic sic eea aaa a a a a aa aa eaa aaa eiaa 1 14 Operating Basics Front Panel Indicators and Connectors 2 ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 2 1 10 Gb s Transceiver Optics
45. The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP PAYLoad PATTern UDATa SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP PAYLoad PATTern UDATa lt NR1 gt 3 48 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA IP STReam INDEX This query form returns the transmitter sub stream index Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP STReam INDEX SOURce DATA IP TRAFfic This command sets the transmitter IP traffic state The query form returns the IP traffic state Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP TRAF fic SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP TRAFfic lt Boolean gt SOURce DATA POS SCRambling This command enables or disables the packet over SONET scrambling The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA POS SCRambling SOURce lt slot gt DATA POS SCRambling lt Boolean gt SOURce DATA OVERhead PASSthru This command controls the source of transmitted overhead data in Through Mode The first parameter specifies an overhead data field the second selects whether that field s data comes from the received signal ON or is generated by the OTS transmitter OFF The query form returns the current setting for the specified field Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA OVERhead PASSthru lt Enum gt SOURce lt slot gt DATA OVERhead PASSthru lt Enum gt lt Boolean gt Parameters Description APS K1 and K2 APS bytes bit value 16 in ALL command DCC_S D1 thr
46. Units for TOTAlIsize are in megabytes Syntax SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts TOTAIsize SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts TOTAlsize lt NR1 gt SYSTem FORMat BLOCk This command selects whether binary block data command parameters are transmitted as raw 8 bit binary characters or pairs of hex digits Some communication links may not be able to send raw binary data The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem FORMat BLOCk SYSTem FORMat BLOCk lt Enum gt Parameters Description BINary Block data uses raw 8 bit binary bytes HEX Block data uses two hex digits per byte SYSTem HEA Ders This command enables or disables command headers in query responses When headers are enabled the response to a query is in the form of a complete command sufficient to set the present value When headers are disabled the query returns only the present value The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem HEADers SYSTem HEADers lt Boolean gt OTS9100 User Manual 3 79 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem LOCK RELease This command releases the lock set by a SYSTEM LOCK REQUEST operation The lock must have been set by the same user an attempt to release a lock set by another user will not succeed If no lock is set this command is ignored Syntax SYSTem LOCK RELease SYSTem LOCK RELease FORCE This command releases any lock set by a SYSTEM LOCK REQUEST operation or any correspond
47. applied to the OTS9100 system be sure that all laser outputs are either covered with the screw cap provided or connected to the appropriate circuit f WARNING Always avoid exposure to the laser beam OTS9100 User Manual Tektronix OTS91L7 MODULE ok o A OPTICAL OUT Ol 10Gb s SIG PRES OPTICAL IN o Rx DATA OUT 50Q2 Rx DATA OUT Q EXT LASER IN Tx DATA IN 0C192 STM64 Rx Tx Figure B 4 Transceiver Interface with External Laser Front Panel B 7 Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions External Laser IN The External Laser In provides interconnection for external fixed or tunable wavelength laser sources The input will accept OTS Tunable lasers or customer supplied lasers that meet specifications A polarization maintaining PM jumper and an optical source with good polarization extinction are required As with the Optical Output the Tx optical input connector can be configured with field interchangeable shells Tx Data IN Tx Data Input provides signal interconnection between the system cards This input must be connected to the Tx Data Out port found on the Transmit card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable provided Optical IN The Optical IN port accepts the incoming optical signal to the receiver This input signal must have a wavelength between 1290 nm and 1565 nm and must not exceed 0dBm of power The LED labeled SIG PRES above the O
48. as shown in Figure 2 38 The Test Control menu allows the user to choose the type of test to run and the time the test will run Test Control OTS9I1R2 10 Gbis Rx 1 Current Test State Complete Time 0s Test Control Mode Continuous Description Figure 2 38 Test Control Menu The Current Test section describes the state of the current test and the time of the current test The Test Control section provides the current test mode and provides an edit box for the user to include a description of the current test To edit the test control settings click on the Edit Test Control Settings button The Test Parameters dialog box shown in Figure 2 39 is now displayed 2 62 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface The Test Mode section enables the user to set continuous timed or timed repetitive tests The Continuous setting configures the test cycle so that it will run continuously from the time that the Start button is clicked until the Stop button is clicked The Timed setting configures the test cycle to run the test for the duration of the test time The Timed Repetitive setting configures the test cycle to run the test for the duration of the test time and then to repeat the same test again To choose the Test Mode click the appropriate radio button Edit Test Control Settings Test Mode Continuous C Timed C Timed Repetitive Test Duration 0 Days 0 Hrs 15 Mins 0
49. be grayed out indicating that the relevant limit is not being checked All changes to parameters do not take effect until the OK button is pressed The overall cleanup process is controlled by the pair of radio buttons at the top of the dialog If the Disabled button is selected then all results file cleanup will be turned off Results file cleanup is accomplished in two steps The first step selects files to be moved or deleted Results file sets a history file and a summary file are processed from oldest to newest based on the setting of the Delete files by oldest control This allows files to be selected based on their creation time last modification time or last accessed time Files are added to the delete move list until all enabled criteria have been met OTS9100 User Manual 2 87 Operating Basics User Interface Results File Deletion Parameters Automatic file deletion move is j C Disabled m File delete move criteria rm File Date J Delete files older than fo M inutes z File Count IV Allow maximum of 100 Files File Size T Limit total results files to E Megabytes J Limit total results files to fp Percent of free disk space Delete files by oldest Creation time m Action for qualifying files Delete Move to directory Check for file deletion every fi 0 Minutes Cancel Figure 2 64 Results File Management dialog box The cleanu
50. but the overwrite contro must be set to allow REI L anomalies to be inserted in through mode The path overhead may also be overwritten B3 may be recalculated J1 C2 F2 H4 Z3 F3 ZA K3 and Z5 N1 are the path overhead bytes available for overwriting The payload can be replaced with an internally generated payload by selecting the Overwrite Payload control OTS9100 User Manual A 3 Specifications NOTE In intrusive through mode any defect applied has immediate effect Certain anomalies have no effect unless overwrite is turned on for the anomaly byte This applies to B1 BIP B1 B2 BIP B2 REI L M1 B3 BIP B3 and REI P G1 Random Bit Random SPE Bit and payload bit may always be applied NOTE G1 may not be explicitly edited but the overwrite contro must be set to allow REI P anomalies to be inserted in through mode Internal Payload Structures In SONET mode the signal can be multiplexed as 192 STS 1 64 STS 3c 16 STS 12c 4 STS 48c or 1 STS 192c In SDH mode the signal can be multiplexed as 192 VC 3 64 VC 4 16 VC 4 4c 4 VC 4 16c or 1 VC 4 64c For STS 1 and VC 3 the stuff columns may be set to 0 or filled with payload In SPE VC3 Bulk mode columns 30 and 59 will be filled with payload In SPE VC3 Stuff mode columns 30 and 59 will be filled with zero byte Active Channel The active channel affects which payload is affected by the active controls including the POH edi
51. cards 1 7 8 9 10 11 Module Interconnection 1 11 Module Quick Check 1 19 27 Multi module system 1 10 Multi Rate Jitter Configuration 1 14 Multi rate jitter testing 1 14 N Narrow Band sinusoidal jitter signal 1 34 Navigation Mode 2 36 37 Navigation window 1 20 22 23 24 27 28 29 2 15 21 25 28 Navigation Window 2 14 21 31 36 37 Non Repeating Zero 2 2 O OC192 2 2 Opening Files on Local System 2 44 Operation 2 44 Optical Test System 2 13 OTS9200 and OTS92S1 User Manual Optical connectors 1 9 Optics module card 1 19 27 28 Optional parameters 3 10 OTS modules 1 2 4 10 19 OTS Product Family 1 1 6 OTS9000 1 7 18 20 OTS9000 chassis 1 7 OTS9010 1 7 OTS9030 1 7 OTS9100 1 1 11 15 OTS91C3 1 2 11 12 16 19 20 OTS91L1 1 11 12 16 19 20 30 OTS91R2 1 11 15 16 19 OTS91T3 1 2 11 15 16 19 20 OTS9200 1 1 2 3 4 6 7 10 19 22 2 1 2 5 17 3 4 5 OTS9210 1 11 15 OTS9210 configuration 1 11 OTS9210 Jitter module 1 11 OTS9225 Jitter module 1 14 OTS92H1 Clock Recovery card 1 1 10 12 16 19 30 OTS92R1 1 1 10 12 16 19 23 30 2 2 OTS92S1 1 1 4 6 7 27 2 1 10 OTS92T1 1 1 10 12 14 19 22 24 2 5 OTS9300 Multi rate module 1 1 14 27 OTS9300 Multi rate SONET SDH module 1 1 OTS93R Ireceiver 1 14 28 OTS93T1 transmitter 1 14 27 28 29 Output jitter compliance 3 5 Output jitter t
52. cccccceeceeccceceeeceeeeeccsseueeseessueeeeeeeeseesunaaeeevaas 3 66 SYSTem COMMu nicate PORT sseui aaa aaa aaa cadence aiaa 3 67 SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A ou ccce cece eeccesceeeeessseueeeeeeeseeseuaeeeesanes 3 68 SYSTem COMMunicate SERI al COMZ2A wu ccccccccccccceecccsseeeeessseeeeeeeeseesuuaeeeesanes 3 72 SYSTem CONFig MODULe rera a rA ER A ESER 3 75 SY STem CONFig SLOTS aean reaa aA A A duets A EE 3 76 SYSTem DESCription SETUDP c ccccceceeeccecceceeeeeeeeeeeaececeeeeesesseeaeeeeeeeeeeeesenaeees 3 76 SYS LemiERROP aici secshee lactase os india aad ten at beens eet 3 77 SYSTem FILES MGMT RESUIts 200 0 cece cece cccs ce eeeeeeeecessueeeeeessaeeeeeeeesesaneeeeeeaas 3 77 SYoLem iFORMat BLOCkes i Scud nil nes ae a r E E fey tats Set ae ceeded 3 79 EOY O LEM HEADGLS E EE cites accent dese ak ad snd bate EOE AE ae de taedese emaseeeds 3 79 SYSTEM LOCK RELEASE orena na se fad a n a e eaaa 3 80 SYSTem LOCK REQ G Si a a a a a a a aaa a an 3 80 SYSTem SIGNal STANCAaIrd aoa a a a aaa aa aa daaa aa aA A R aR 3 80 OYO LEM VERBOSE ae ee ee Le a ee 3 81 FEOT eA E T a el Sl ee tees 3 81 Appendices Specifications sea emean aaea aiaa eneee ap karaa a a E enara ae eaea sanaaa aeaaeai aiii A 1 Le oier EOT ao AEE T EE A A TT B 1 Emergency Startup Disk ssssnasnseunnnnnnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn C 1 Listor ACro NYIMS ised ce do can cece eE a eea de cendede dh ctcetdacandcve d
53. coax cable one included with shipment 174 4277 01 8 coax cable one included with shipment 1 4 OTS9100 User Manual Getting Started OTS91L7 Standard 174 4702 00 6 coax cable two included with shipment 174 4277 01 8 coax cable one included with shipment OTS91L8 Standard 174 4702 00 6 coax cable one included with shipment Note Optical connectors require customer supplied cabling OTS91R2 Standard 174 4275 01 4 coax cable one included with shipment 119 6156 00 DC Block OTS91T3 Standard 174 4275 01 4 coax cable one included with shipment 174 4275 01 6 coax cable one included with shipment 119 6156 00 DC Block OTS91C3 Standard 174 4275 01 4 coax cable one included with shipment Optional Interface Cables RS 232 C GPIB RS 232 C 012 1379 00 9 pin female to 9 pin male 012 1298 00 9 pin female to 25 pin male GPIB 012 0991 00 2m double shielded 012 0991 01 1m double shielded NOTE The GPIB cable is standard equipment with an OTS9010 mainframe OTS9100 User Manual 1 5 Getting Started Adapters SMA 015 0572 00 015 0554 00 015 0549 00 020 1693 00 Miscellaneous 119 5610 00 119 5970 00 119 5972 00 SMA male to BNC male SMA male to BNC female Male to female connector Used permanently installed to prolong life of instrument connector SMA Kit Fixed 15 dB optical attenuator FC PC connector Fixed 15dB optical attenuator SC PC connector Fi
54. e Rx DEFECT CLOCK OUT The Defect indicator can be off red or yellow This indicator will turn red when a defect no signal present LOS LOF OOF SEF MS AIS AIS L MS RDI RDI L LOP AIS P or RDI P is detected It will flash red if defects are detected 50Q intermittently 0C192 A yellow history indicator signifies that a Defect has been STOLE detected since the most recent test started but is not currently detected The Defect indicator will turn off when a new test is started Figure 2 4 Receive Front Panel OTS9100 User Manual 2 5 Operating Basics Functional Overview ANOMALY The Anomaly indicator can be off red or yellow This indicator will turn red if an anomaly B1 B2 REI L B3 FAS REI P or payload error is detected It will flash red if an anomaly is detected intermittently A yellow history indicator signifies that an Anomaly has been detected since the most recent test started but is not currently detected The Anomaly indicator will turn off when a new test is started Rx Event OUT The Rx Event Output is user activated and provides an active HIGH for each alarm or error condition generated The output will provide a single pulse for each frame containing errors It can be used as a means of triggering an oscilloscope or other test equipment The output has an SMA connector and requires 50 termination for signal integrity Rx Data IN The Rx Data Input provides sig
55. failed 3 34 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe MEASure APSTime THREshold This command sets the threshold time for APS switch time measurement If the measured switch time exceeds the threshold time the test fails The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure APSTime THREshold SENSe lt slot gt MEASure APSTime THREshold lt NR1 gt SENSe MEASure APSTime VALUe This query returns as a NR1 value the APS switch time value measured by the most recently performed APS measurement The units for the value can be specified as milliseconds microseconds or frames If the unit specification is omitted the unit defaults to milliseconds Syntax SENSe MEASure APSTime VALUe lt Enum gt Parameters Description FRAMES The current APS time value in frames USEC The current APS time value in microseconds MSEC The current APS time in milliseconds NOTE This command is only targeted for a receiver card Unlike other cards you cannot target the optical card directly by using the slot number of the optical card SENSe MEA Sure HDLC FRAMes This query returns the value of the specified result parameter in NR1 format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure HDLC FRAMes lt Parameter gt Parameters Description GFCS Count of HDLC frames received with good FCS BFCS Count of HDLC frames received with bad FCS ABORted Count of aborted HDLC frames INValid C
56. first condition occurs Once the first condition occurs the Test Time Limit starts and ends the test once the limit is reached To set the limit click in the text box and enter the new limit up to one minute The Switch Time Threshold is the test limit The APS switch time entered as usec is the time elapsed between the first condition occurrence and the last condition occurrence If the time between these two events exceeds the Switch Time Threshold the test fails If the time is within the Switch Time Threshold the test passes To set this threshold click in the text box and enter the new threshold The Conditions Found area of the menu lists any non Condition Tested errors that occurred during the Switch Time Threshold To start the test click the Start APS Test button NOTE When the test is begun the Test Active status button will light The test does not actually start until the first Condition occurs For example if the AIS L is the selected Condition Tested the Test Time Limit will not trigger until the first AIS L error occurs At that point whether it be five minutes or five hours after the start test button was clicked the Test Time Limit will trigger and the test will begin To copy the test results click the Copy Results to Clipboard button A dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2 54 which allows annotations to be added to the results file and provides the file for viewing Once OK is clicked the results
57. following functionality Access to test results files either on the OTS system or on the file system of the computer that is running Results Viewer Display of results data Cumulative Results Analysis and History with the same presentation as the OTS User Interface TekUI Printing of Cumulative Results and Analysis data and export of the same text to an ASCII text file or the Windows clipboard Export of Cumulative Results Analysis and History data in delimited ASCI text form to a file or to the Windows clipboard Printing of History data to a graphical form Copying results files to a directory on the local file system NOTE The results of a test are stored in two files with the same file name but different extensions One has extension sum summary information and one has the extension his history data Although ResultsViewer file selection operations involve only the sum file both files are used and must be present and in the same directory Therefore Ifyou copy a test s results files to another computer or directory you must copy both the sum and the his files If you rename a test s results files you must rename both the sum and his file to have the same name Ifyou use the File menu Save As function to copy the currently active test results to a directory on the local computer the operation creates both the sum and the his files under the specified name
58. header packet size The query form returns the transmitter IP header packet size Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer PSIZe OTS9100 User Manual 3 47 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA IP HEADer TSERVice This command sets the IP header type of service The query form returns the IP header type of service Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer TSERVice SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer TSERVice lt NR1 gt SOURce DATA IP HEADer TTLive This command sets the transmitter IP header time to live The query form returns the transmitter IP header time to live Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer TTLive SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer TTLive lt NR1 gt SOURce DATA IP HEADer VERSion This query returns the IP header version The value returned is formatted as NR1 parameter Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer VERSion SOURce DATA IP PAYLoad PATTern This command selects the test pattern inserted as IP payload into the transmitted signal The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP PAYLoad PAT Tern SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP PAYLoad PAT Tern lt Parameter gt Parameters Description PRBS31A ITU standard PRBS 2431 1 pattern USER Constant 16 bit user specified data SOURce DATA IP PAYLoad PATTern UDATa This command specifies the data value inserted into the transmitted signal when constant data is selected for the IP test pattern
59. is ignored SYSTem COMMunicate PORT TXTERM This command controls for the current remote control port the characters the OTS system sends at the end of a query response The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate PORT TXTERM SYSTem COMMunicate PORT TXTERM lt Enum gt Parameters Description LF Line feed LF character Ox0A CR Carriage return CR character 0x0D CRLF CR followed by LF LFCR LF followed by CR SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A DTR 3 68 This command controls the state of the DTR Data Terminal Ready control signal on the COM1 port The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A DTR lt SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A DTR lt Boolean gt OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A ECHO This command controls for the COM1 serial port how the system echoes the characters it receives The parameter is a numeric value containing three individual control bits The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A ECHO SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A ECHO lt NR1 gt Bit value 0 1 2 4 Function Disables echo Enables echo Causes the input terminator character to be echoed as CR LF Enables input line buffering received characters are not processed until the terminating CR or LF SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A ENABle Th
60. minutes seconds e g 3d 4h 2m 15s 2 70 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface If the first character of the time specification is a plus or minus sign the time is taken relative to the current cursor position When the Time Axis display is set to Time of Day times are taken as time of day day specifications are relative to 0 the first day of the test Thus 1 00 PM on the day following the start of the test would be entered as 1d 13 00 00 The Live Update check box causes the data display to track new data as a test is running When it is set the cursor is automatically positioned on the most recently acquired sample and the windows scroll accordingly Moving the cursor automatically turns off this feature When the Zoom Out In slider is set to a resolution other than the finest the display may be automatically zoomed by clicking the mouse at one edge of the area of interest holding down the left button and dragging it to the other edge The zoom setting and scroll position will adjust to show the selected area at the highest resolution possible The Test window shows the test start time and date elapsed time and test state The Data at Cursor window shows the cursor position elapsed time or time of day as selected the count of the selected parameter at the cursor and the maximum value for that parameter at the current display resolution The Search controls allow searching forward or backwar
61. module using the coax cable provided Figure 2 6 Clock Trigger Front Panel OTS9100 User Manual 2 9 Operating Basics Functional Overview 10 GHz Clock Out This output is connected to the OTS91T3 card using the coax cable provided 10 GHz CLOCK IN The 10 GHz Clock IN provides a bit rate clock input that typically is connected to the OTS92H1 10 GHz JITTER Clock Out port This input is selected when Transmit Timing is set to Jitter 2 10 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Software Interface Operating Basics This section describes the OTS9000 software interface It also reviews the basic functionality of the Microsoft Windows application software with menu descriptions User Interface The user interface software for the OTS Family Optical Test System controls all configuration testing and measuring commands of the OTS cards The user interface provides easily navigated menus using Windows point and click operation on a Windows 2000 workstation Refer to the section Getting Started for information on how to load and launch the user interface software When the OTS Optical Test System is first powered on the software scans the card slots to determine what modules are loaded The user interface then provides icons in the navigation window for each card loaded into the system These icons always reflect the cards loaded and will change depending on the system being used Because of t
62. off the power 2 Fully loosen the two screws found on the top and bottom of the card 3 Push up on the top release and down on the bottom release until the card is released from the connectors 4 Carefully slide the card out of the slot NOTE If a card is removed a blanking panel and air diverter must be installed to ensure proper airflow through the system Failure to replace the air diverter and blanking panel could cause the system to overheat 1 8 OTS9100 User Manual Getting Started Slot Positioning of OTS Cards The slot in which each card is installed is very important to the proper operation of the instrument Because of the user interface configurations certain cards must be in specific slot positions in order to take advantage of features to operate correctly The OTS9100 module consists of a grouping of four cards For every OTS9100 module group the Optics card must be in the leftmost card or slot 1 Does not apply to a multi channel system The Optics card must be followed by the Receive card in the second position the Transmit card must be in the third position and the Clock Trigger card must always be in the right most position or fourth position within the four card module grouping Multiple Modules A module group may span the CPU in a multi module system if necessary The sequence of cards should continue from one side of the CPU slot s onto the other side The CPU card s may interrupt the sequence phys
63. or click Set Channel to choose channel 1 If the Set All button is clicked the Background Channels section is grayed out Set channel from 1 to 192 or set all OTS9100 User Manual 2 27 Operating Basics User Interface 2 28 Signal Structure Signal structure allows the user to choose the mapping structure of the transmitted signal The mapping structures provided are listed in the table below As shown the structures all provide concatenated structures SONET SDH 1 x STS 192c 1 x VC4 64c 4 x STS 48c 4 x VC4 16c 16 x STS 12c 16 x VC4 4c 64 x STS 3c 64 x VC4 192 x STS 1 192 x VC3 Test Pattern Test Pattern allows the user the select a pattern to fill the chosen active channel of the internally generated 9 95238 Gb s signal The patterns available are gt PNI15 PRBS 2415 1 Inverted PN15 ITU 0 151 PN23 PRBS 2 23 1 Inverted PN23 ITU 0 151 PN31 PRBS 2431 1 Inverted PN31 ITU 0 150 All Zeros All Ones Fixed Data 8 bit gt POS Only valid when Signal Structure is STS 192c VC 4 64C When Fixed Data is selected a button marked Edit Fixed Data is displayed To change the Fixed Data to a different value click the Edit Fixed Data button and type the new value into the text box beside the button In the Test Pattern selection box observe that the value after Fixed Data changes to match the newly entered value Packet Over SONET POS In order to use the POS testing capabilities POS mu
64. protocol initial values Current serial or network port session protocol Remote Control Lockout These commands enable remote control lockout system lock request system lock release System Configuration Queries system communicate gpib primary system communicate gpib secondary system communicate serial com1a enable system communicate serial com1a rate system communicate serial com1a ndata system communicate serial com1a nstop system communicate serial com1a flow system communicate serial com1a parity system communicate serial com1a dtr system communicate serial com1a rts system communicate serial com2a as above system communicate network ipport system communicate serial com1a echo system communicate serial com1a prompt system communicate serial com1a rxterm system communicate serial com1a txterm system communicate serial com2a as above system communicate network as above system communicate port as above These commands provide the ability to query the modules installed in the OTS9100 system to determine what configurations are installed system config module slots system config module type system config module version system config module variant system config module serial 3 2 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Commands Overview Save and Restore System Settings These commands provide the save and restore functionality for system level s
65. secondary addressing The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SECOndary SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SECOndary lt Enum gt lt NR1 gt Parameters Description NONE Secondary GPIB addressing is disabled OTS9100 User Manual 3 65 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork ECHO This command sets the initial value of the echo control variable for new network connections This setting has no effect on connections already established see SYSTEM COMMUNICATE PORT ECHO The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork ECHO SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork ECHO lt NR1 gt Bit value Function 0 Disables echo 1 Enables echo 2 Causes the input terminator character to be echoed as CR LF 4 Enables input line buffering received characters are not processed until the terminating CR or LF SY STem COMMunicate NETWork IPPORT This command sets the IP port address on which the system listens for new connections Changing the setting has no effect on connections already established The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPPORT SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPPORT lt NR1 gt SY STem COMMunicate NETWork PROMpt This command sets the initial state of the user prompt on new network connections This setting has no effect on connections already established see SYSTEM COMMUNICATE PORT PROMPT The q
66. shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper user or connection to incompatible equipment or c to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER
67. test 2e ko 2e lt lt lt as 2e 2o lt 2e ko 2o lt ko 2o lt ko 2o lt ko 2e lt lt lt lt ko 2e Calendar day relative to the day on which the test started Time of day LOS LOF OOF TIM S RS TIM AIS L MS AIS RDI L MS RDI B1 B2 FAS REI L MS REl TIM P HP TIM AIS P HP AIS RDI P HP RDI B3 REI P HP REl TSE LSS PLM HP PLM NOTE TIM P HP TIM through PLM HP PLM are applicable only for OTS91R2 module cards H3 Test Pause Power Out indicator Time in hr min sec of pause NOTE The number of samples in the H1 record includes samples with all counts zero even if the report is set to exclude these OTS9100 User Manual 2 97 Operating Basics User Interface Configuring the exported data 2 98 To configure the exported data click on Export and select Data Setup The Configure Data Report dialog box as shown in Figure 2 66 is now displayed To enable a selection click the box or radio button beside it The report written to the file or clipboard is configured accordingly Configure Data Report xi m Data to Include m Text to Include IV Record Type Codes IV Section Headings Cancel IV Test File Info V Column Headings V Cumulative Results MV Row Headings IV SONET Analysis I SDH Analysis r Field
68. the order in which they are listed under SENSe ANALysis GR253A LINE FAR Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis GR253A LINE FAR ALL SENSe ANALysis GR253A LINE NEAR This query returns the value of the specified Near End Line parameter from GR 253 analysis of received data Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis GR253A LINE NEAR lt Enum gt Parameters Description CV_C CV Count CV_R CV Count ratio BBE_C Background block errors BBE_R Background block error ratio ES C Errored seconds ES R Errored second ratio SES_C Severely errored seconds SES_R Severely errored second ratio ESA_C Errored seconds type A ESA_R Errored second type A ratio ESB_C Errored seconds type B ESB_R Errored second type B ratio CSES_C Consecutive SES periods UAS_C Unavailable seconds UAS_R Unavailable seconds error ratio SENSe ANALysis GR253A LINE NEAR ALL This query returns the values of all of the Near End Line parameters from GR 253 analysis of received data The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSe ANALysis GR253A LINE NEAR Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis GR253A LINE NEAR ALL 3 20 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis GR253A PATH FAR This query returns the value of the specified Far End Path parameter from GR 253 analysis of received data Ratios are returned as NR3 values other parameters as NR1 values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis GR253
69. this query might be the value 100 it might also be formatted as a complete command for example lt SENSE INPUT THRESHOLD 100 as controlled by the SYSTEM HEADERS and SYSTEM VERBOSE commands q v OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Syntax Parameter types and formats Parameter values may be of several different types e g integer numbers floating point numbers selections from a list of particular values strings etc The following are the parameter types that appear in OTS9100 remote control commands lt NRI gt lt NR2 gt lt NR3 gt An integer number A decimal number with integer and or fractional parts e g 12 43 A decimal number in scientific notation e g 1 243E1 NOTE A command parameter value specified as lt NR2 gt or lt NR3 gt may be entered in either standard or scientific notation formats A query will return its value in the format indicated lt Enum gt lt Boolean gt lt String gt A selection from an enumerated list of values that appear as alphanumeric keywords usually with a mnemonic value For example the command that specifies the payload inserted into the generated signal appears as lt SOURCE DATA PAYLOAD PATTERN lt Enum gt followed by a list of possible values PRBS23A Standard PRBS 2 1 pattern PRBS231 Inverted PRBS 2 1 pattern ZEROS Constant zero data ONES Constant one data The command must include one of these values the corres
70. to simulate network element generated traffic without the Trace Identifier Mismatch TIM alarm being generated The OTS9100 capability to display the received J1 trace allows users to verify continuity and correct routing of individual channels within the multi channel DWDM system J1 Trace Editor C No Trace 16 Byte Trace G 707 eae 64 Byte Trace GR 253 Trace Value Tektronix BTT Path Trace J1 Trace Tektronix BTT Length 16 Bytes Edit J1 Trace Figure 2 19 Transmitter J1 Trace dialog box To edit click on the Edit J1 Trace button A dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2 19 reflecting the current settings of the J1 Trace Click the appropriate radio button to choose between No Trace 16 Byte Trace and 64 Byte Trace To input a Trace Value click in the Trace Value box and start typing When edits are complete click OK to return to the main menu In 16 byte the last byte is filled with CRC In 64 byte the last two bytes are filled with CR LF 2 36 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Transmitter Error Insertion The error insertion menu as shown in Figure 2 21 of the Transmitter setup allows the user to inject anomalies and defects m Setup OTS91T3 10 Gb s Tx 1 Setup l Signal Transport Overhead Path Overhead Error Insertion K1 K2 Decode IP Payload IP Erro Anomaly Insertion Anomaly Insertion Setup Current Anomaly OTS91R1
71. will accept OTS Tunable lasers or customer supplied lasers that meet specifications A polarization maintaining PM jumper and an optical source with good polarization extinction are required As with the Optical Output the Tx optical input connector can be configured with field interchangeable shells Tx Data IN Tx Data Input provides signal interconnection between the system cards This input must be connected to the Tx Data Out port found on the Transmit card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable provided 2 10 OTS9100 User Manual Emergency Startup Disk These instructions explain how to make an emergency startup disk for your OTS system It is recommended that you take the time to do this procedure every time you change your system configuration such as modifying the network settings The process takes less than five minutes Accessing Help Files The procedure for making an emergency startup disk is located in the Windows Help files Follow the steps below to access these files and create the emergency disk You will need a blank floppy disk for the procedure NOTE Make sure you are on the correct OTS system before making the emergency disk Because of licensing information an emergency startup disk must be made for each system Click on the Start menu and select Help In the Help dialog box select the Index tab and type in Emergency 3 The following dialog box is displayed Click on the button as pr
72. works in conjunction with the Receive card which contains all of the receiver functionality and analysis capability for the OTS system OPTICAL IN OPTICAL IN Figure B 1 shows the Transceiver Optics card front panels Module OK The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running On power up the LED first lights red then changes to green when the system has finished initializing NOTE If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing or fails to light at all call Tek service Optical OUT The Optical Output emits an optical data signal at a wavelength of 1310nm or 1550nm The optical connector can be configured with field interchangeable shells FC standard ST or SC type The field Tx DATA IN Tx DATAIN interchangeable shells are easily removed to allow easy cleaning of the connector interface The LED found above the Optical OUT heading flashes amber for five seconds and turns green when the laser is actived NOTE If the LED flashes red continues to flash amber or fails to light at all call Tektronix for service is applied to the OTS9100 system be sure that all laser outputs are either covered with the screw cap provided or connected to the appropriate circuit one OC182 STM64 Rx Tx Tx Figure B 1 Transceiver Front Panels A WARNING Always avoid exposure to the laser beam Before power OTS9100 User Manual B 1 Optical Card Front Panel Desc
73. 2 1705 00 OTS91L413 Tx Rx Optics card 1310 nm 672 1706 00 OTS91L415 Tx Rx Optics card 1550 nm 672 1707 00 OTS91L513 Tx Optics card 1310 nm 672 1708 00 OTS91L515 Tx Optics card 1550 nm 672 1709 00 OTS91L6 Rx Optics card 672 1710 00 OTS91L7 External Tx Rx Optics card 672 1711 00 OTS91L8 External Tx Optics card 672 1604 00 OTS9I1RI1 Receive card 672 1647 00 OTS91R2 Receive card 672 1605 00 OTS91T1 Transmit card 672 1646 00 OTS91T2 Transmit card 672 1689 00 OTS91T3 Transmit card OTS9100 User Manual E 1 Module Card Replacement E 2 OTS9100 User Manual Installing the Software These instructions explain how to load the software The OTS90x0 system is shipped with the software pre loaded This procedure should only be required if the software is accidentally wiped off the hard drive or if you receive a system software upgrade NOTE The installation software will first remove any previous versions of the OTS90x0 system software prior to loading the new version Since this involved a restarting the computer it is recommended that all programs be closed prior to performing the installation 1 Remove the OTS90x0 CDrom from its case and place the CDrom into the OTS90x0 CDrom drive 2 The CDrom setup program should start automatically If it does not click Start Run and type in lt CDrom drive letter gt setup exe 3 Follow the prompts to install the new version of the software 4 When the software is fini
74. 2 Slot 2 10 Gb s Rx 1 Incorrect FCS frames 0 OTSSIR2 1 m HDLC bytes with correct FCS 21854405920 CELI OTSS1T3 E EGU Transmitter IP Packets BE Total packets 14530855 Summary Good packets 14530855 Packets with errors 0 LOCKOUT ETOL ye Laser 4 Figure 2 8 Transmitter IP Measurements display In the Transmitter IP Packets section Packets with errors is the total of the errors for the IP header checksum and payload Only one error type may be inserted at a time The Good IP Packets count is performed prior to FCS computation Introducing FCS errors results in a mismatch between the transmitter and receiver IP Good packets results This is due to the fact that the receiver does not process IP datagrams with incorrect FCS OTS9100 User Manual 2 73 Operating Basics User Interface Analysis Menu When the Analysis Category bar is selected from the Navigation window and an icon chosen the Analysis properties menu associated with that device icon is displayed The results are accumulated while the test runs and are cleared when a new test begins The Analysis property menu contains two separate menu screens each selected by a tab These tabs SONET T1M1 and SDH G 826 each display an aspect of the Receiver Analysis function Analysis SONET T1M1 The SONET T1M1 menu has two selections provided for Analysis Results Section Line and Path Click either one to display the SO
75. 3 2 System Configuration Queries sssri ir ienaneti rnrn EEA nEi nRa raan EENAA SERNA ARA ERARE AAAA 3 2 Save and Restore System Settings seessseeeseeneerneseernssttrnstttnnnsttnnssttnnnstennnnenna 3 3 System File Management sssessssseessrnsssenessnranstsnnesnnnnaatennasnnnnannnnadnnnaaasnnnnennanannannae 3 3 System Signal Standard OTS9100 module 0 eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeaas 3 3 Receiver Commands OTS9100 Module ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeaas 3 3 Received Signal Measurement Commands OTS9100 module ceeeeeeeeee 3 4 Received Signal Analysis Commands OTS9100 module ceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee 3 5 Receiver Test Control OTS9100 MOdUIe ee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 3 5 Transmitter Commands OTS9100 MOdUle 0 ee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeees 3 5 SY MAK ec csevccsecnet tect vets terete E E deetunana aie eeenic 3 6 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands cececcecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesececaeeeeeeeeesesinaeeneees 3 6 SCPI Commands and Queries ccccccceeeeeeeeeceee cece ee eececaaeeeeeeeeeseseeeaeeeeeseseenaees 3 8 Parameter Types and Format ccccceceseeececeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesnaeeeeeeaaeeeseeneeeesenaeeeeeeaaes 3 9 Optional and Alternative Parametels cccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeteees 3 10 Abbreviating Commands Queries and ParameterS c cccccceeceeee
76. 50ppm Description Provides the Bit rate clock for the transmitter data output This input is connected to the 10 Ghz Clock OUT of the Clock Trigger card OTS91C3 10 GHz Trigger Output A 12 OTS9100 User Manual Specifications Connector SMA External Termination 50Q DC coupled Voltage Level 0 0 Vdc 800 mVpp nominal Frequency 9 95238 GHz Description Provides a copy of the 10 GHz Clock OUT which may be used for a scope trigger RX Clock Input Connector SMA Internal Termination 50Q AC coupled Voltage Level 800 mVpp nominal Frequency 155 52 MHz 150 ppm Description Signal is used by the PLL to lock the transmitter data output to recovered clock Used for through mode or recovered timing when selected 10 GHz Clock Output Connector SMA External Termination 50Q AC coupled Voltage Output 2 19 0 41 Vpp 0 0 Vdc 10 6dbm 1 6db Frequency 9 95328 GHz 150 ppm Description Bit rate clock for transmitter data output This output is connected to the 10GHz Clock IN of the Transmit card OTS9100 User Manual A 13 Specifications Receiver Input and Output Specifications OTS91L4 OTS91L6 OTS91L7 Signal Name 9 95238 Gb s Optical Input Data Signal Rate 9 95238 Gb s 100ppm Connector FC PC standard ST or SC available Wavelength 1290nm to 1565nm Maximum Input Power 0 dBm Input Power Range 17 dBm to 2dBm at 1525 nm 1565 nm BER lt 10 16 dBm to 2 dBm at 1290 nm 1330 nm BER l
77. 91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 SONET 10 Gb s STS 3c Signal Present Threshold Offset 5 mv Test State Complete TestPattern PRBS 2 23 1 Inverted ITU 0 151 OTS91T3 10 Gb s Tx 1 SONET 10 Gb s STS 3c Signal Source Internal Error Insertion Inactive Pe Turn Laser On Timing Source Internal Test Patten PRBS 2 23 1 Inverted ITU 0 151 OTS93T1 2 5 Gb s Tx 1 SONET 2 5 Gb s STS 48c Signal Source Internal Error Insertion Inactive B eS Turn Laser On Clock Source Internal Test Pattern PRBS 2 23 1 Inverted ITU 0 151 OTS93R1 2 5 Gb s Rx 1 SONET 2 5 Gb s STS 48c Q Signal Present Threshold Offset 0 Test State Complete Receiver Setup Test Pattern PRBS 2 23 1 Inverted ITU 0 151 OTS92R1 Jitter Analyzer 1 9 953 Gb s Lock Filter Bandwidth 20 kHz 80 MHz Wideband Analyzer Setup Status Signal Type Data Jitter Hit Threshold 1 000 Ulpp OTS92T1 Jitter Generator 1 9 953 Gb s LockStatus Transmit State Off Frequency 10 00 kHz Generator Setup Amplitude 1 00 UI OTS91 RI 10 Gb s Rx 1 SONET Signal Present Threshold Offset 0 mv Test State Complete Receiver Setup OTS91T1 10 Gb s Tx 1 SONET 10 Gb s STS 3c Signal Source Internal Error Insertion Inactive Bes Turn Laser On Transmitter Setup Clock Source Internal Test Pattern PRBS 2 23 1 OTS9251 Synchronization Module 1 Lock Status Timing Reference Internal Signal Present Frequency
78. A SENSe lt slot gt DATA IP PAYLoad PATTerm UDATA lt NR1 gt SSENSe DATA IP STReam INDEX This query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA IP STReam INDEX SENSe DATA PATH TRACe This query returns the most recently received J1 path trace type length and data See the command SOURce DATA PATH TRACe for the formats of the enum and block values returned The data bytes are returned in standard IEEE 488 block data format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe 3 28 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe DATA PATH TRACe TY PE This query returns the most recently received J1 path trace type length See the command SOURce DATA PATH TRACe TYPE for the format of the enum value returned Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe TYPE SENSe DATA PATH TRACe VALUe This query returns the most recently received J1 path trace data The data bytes are returned in IEEE 488 block data format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe VALUe SENSe DATA PATH TRACe VALUe STRIng This query returns the most recently received J1 path trace data The data is returned as an ASCII string Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe VALUe STRIng SENSe DATA PAYLoad PATTern This command selects the test pattern for the received signal The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad PAT Tern lt SENSe lt
79. A PATH FAR lt Enum gt Parameters Description CV_C CV Count CV_R CV Count ratio BBE_C Background block errors BBE_R Background block error ratio ES C Errored seconds ES R Errored second ratio SES_C Severely errored seconds SES_R Severely errored second ratio ESA_C Errored seconds type A ESA_R Errored second type A ratio ESB_C Errored seconds type B ESB_R Errored second type B ratio CSES_C Consecutive SES periods UAS_C Unavailable seconds UAS_R Unavailable seconds error ratio SENSe ANALysis GR253A PATH FAR ALL This query returns the values of all of the Far End Path parameters from GR 253 analysis of received data The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under the heading SENSe ANALysis GR253A PATH FAR Ratios are returned as NR3 values other parameters as NR1 values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis GR253A PATH FAR ALL OTS9100 User Manual 3 21 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis GR253A PATH NEAR This query returns the value of the specified Near End Path parameter from GR 253 analysis of received data Ratios are returned as NR3 values other parameters as NR1 values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis GR253A PATH NEAR lt Enum gt Parameters Description CV_C CV Count CV_R CV Count ratio BBE_C Background block errors BBE_R Background block error ratio ES _C Errored seconds ES_R Errored second ratio SES_C Severely errored seconds SES _
80. ACe VALUe SENSe DATA SECTion TRACe VALUe STRIng This query returns the most recently received JO section trace data The data is returned as an ASCII string Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe VALUe STRIng OTS9100 User Manual 3 31 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe DATA SPE STUF fing This command controls the receiver s treatment of columns 30 and 59 which can be used for SPE fixed byte stuffing When enabled these columns are treated as stuffing columns and are not considered part of the payload When disabled columns 30 and 59 are treated as part of the payload This command is applicable only to STS 1 structure The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA SPE STUFfing SENSe lt slot gt DATA SPE STUFfing lt Boolean gt SENSe DATA STRUcture This command sets the receiver structure The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA STRUcture SENSe lt slot gt DATA STRUcture lt Enum gt Parameters Description G10C Bulk data at 10 Gb s G2P5C Bulk data at 2 5 Gb s M622C Bulk data at 622 Mb s M155C Bulk data at 155 Mb s M51A Bulk data at 51 Mb s SONET only SENSe DATA TOH STM1A ALL This query returns a block of data representing the Transport Overhead data from an STM 1 in the received signal There are 81 bytes three groups of 27 in the block returned representing the STS 1 overhead data for each STS
81. At b m All Tests Control Setup OTS91T1 10 Gb s Tx 1 Scroll Rocker A Clear History Control Slot 2 OTSS1R2 1 Slot 2 OTSS1R2 1 Card Slot Selection Drop Down Menu Active LED Tool Bar Window a dockable Paes floating window Frame Grabbers a Overhead Error Insertion J Scroll Controls OTSR eN Signal Standard SONET a Rx 1 for extended Signal Source intemal x Navigation i oo Signal Structure sts 2c a Window OTS91T1 10 Gb7 m Tx 1 Test Pattern PRBS 2 23 1 x Timing Source Internal gt orssir3 10 Gb Output Trigger Trigger on Defect 7 Tut 1 z Navigation OTS92R1 Jitter Window Analyzer 1 a dockable z floating OTS9251 wind ow Synchronization Module 1 z OTSS2T1 Jitter Generator HEJ Catege eae RCSL aul ari Inactive s Title Property Pages Bars for each function Figure 2 6 Laser Off Status bar indicators Location of Status and Navigation Windows displayed in a Single Mode View 2 12 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Task Bar Bini TS perag Lee Smula barbere Benp ORT OGR O The Task bar reflects the active device and function When a device is selected from the Navigation window the identification of that device will appear in the Task bar The window controls for the Tektronix interface can be accessed by using these selections they inc
82. B interface between the controller and the instruments The OTS9100 complies with this standard Command and Query Structure The syntax of an IEEE 488 2 common command is an asterisk followed by a command and optionally a space and parameter value The syntax for an IEEE 488 2 common query is an asterisk followed by a query and a question mark The following are examples of common commands ESE 16 CLS The following are examples of common queries ESR IDN OTS9100 User Manual 3 6 Reference Remote Commands Syntax Block Format IEEE 488 block format is a means of encoding arbitrary binary data including characters that aren t valid in text strings for transmission over a GPIB link The format is most easily explained with an example This is a block containing 16 bytes of data 2 16abcdeFGHIJkimnop where denotes the start of a block 2 is the number of digits that follow to represent the byte count in the block 16 is the number represented by two decimal digits of data bytes abcdeFGHI JkIlmnop is the 16 data bytes in this example The OTS9100 uses blocks in commands and queries for overhead data and section trace sequences the descriptions of these commands include the number of bytes expected or sent Hex Block Format The GPIB can transmit eight bit binary data without problems But the OTS9100 can also be controlled over RS 232 serial links and Telnet protocol
83. CPI standard The SCPI language is based on a hierarchical tree structure as shown in Figure 3 1 that represents a subsystem The top level of the tree is the root node it is followed by one or more lower level nodes SENSe lt Root node MEASure Lower level nodes LINE SECTion WINDow Figure 3 1 Example of SCPI subsystem hierarchy tree You can create commands and queries from these subsystem hierarchy trees Command Format A command sets the value of an instrument parameter or initiates an instrument event A command consists of one or more alphanumeric keywords separated by colons this part is called the header If the command includes parameter values these appear after the header and separated from the header by a space Multiple parameter values are separated by commas Example The command to set the OTS 9100 Receiver input threshold voltage to 100 mV is SENSE INPUT THRESHOLD 100 where SENSE INPUT THRESHOLD is the header and 100 is the parameter value Query format 3 8 A query fetches the current value of an instrument parameter measurement or status condition A query consists of a header like that of a command followed by a question mark If a query includes parameter values these appear after the question mark and a separating space Example The query to fetch from the OTS 9100 Receiver the current setting of the input threshold voltage is SENSE INPUT THRESHOLD The response to
84. DATA SPE STUFfing lt Boolean gt SOURce DATA STRUcture This command sets the structure of the signal generated by the OTS 9000 transmitter The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA STRUcture SOURce lt slot gt DATA STRUcture lt Enum gt Parameter Description G10C Bulk data at 10Gb s G2P5C Bulk data at 2 5 Gb s M622C Bulk data at 622 Mb s M155C Bulk data at 155 Mb s M51A Bulk data at 51 Mb s SONET only SOURce DATA TOH STS1IA ALL This command sets the values of all bytes in the generated STS 1 1 Transport Overhead data The query form returns the current setting There are 27 bytes in the data block These correspond to the overhead bytes A1 A2 JO B1 E1 F1 D1 D2 D3 H1 H3 B2 K1 K2 D4 D12 S1 Z2 E2 Only those bytes marked with are settable the values of the other bytes are automatically set by the transmitter Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA TOH STS1A ALL lt NR1 gt SOURce lt slot gt DATA TOH STS1A ALL lt NR1 gt lt Block gt SOURce DATA TOH STSIA BYTE This command sets the value of a specific byte in the generated STS 1 1 Transport Overhead data The byte selection is specified by three numeric parameters for STS 1 number row and column because only STS 1 1 may be selected the first parameter must be set to 1 The query form returns the current byte value Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA TOH STS1A BYTE lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt l
85. DH If it occurs in three consecutive frames MS RDI is declared AIS P If the pointer equals 3FF for three to five frames then AIS P is declared OTS9100 User Manual A 7 Specifications RDI P If the G1 bits 5 6 and 7 do not equal 000 or 001 a RDI P condition is declared REI P If the G1 bits 1 through 4 contain the numbers one through eight binary 0001 through 1000 a REI P condition is declared Overhead Display Approximately every 100 milliseconds each byte of the first three STS 1 Transport Overheads AU 4 are extracted and displayed JO and J1 are extracted and displayed in ASCII string Trace Identifier Mismatch TIM can be declared by comparing against a user defined trace A 8 OTS9100 User Manual Specifications Transmitter Input and Output Specifications OTS91L4 15 OTS91L5 15 Signal Name 9 95238 Gb s Optical Output Data Signal Rate 9 95238 Gb s 100ppm Pulse Mask Compliance GR 253 SONET G 957 SDH Data Format PN7 scrambled NRZ formatted data in BERT mode unframed and unscrambled PRBS data Wavelength 1550 nm 6 nm Average Power 2 3 dBm minimum 5 dBm typical Extinction Ratio 210 dB minimum 12 dB typical Wavelength Aging Drift 0 01nm yr Sidemode Suppression gt 30 dB Chirp amp 0 nominal Optical Return Loss gt 30dB minimum Eye Crossing 50 typical Connector FC PC standard SC or ST available Optical Rise and Fall Time lt 30 ps at 20 80 Optical E
86. ED Module Display 2 20 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Table 2 1 Description of Status Window Virtual LED Indicators LED name Description Signal Present The Signal indicator will light green when the receiver senses an incoming signal LOS The Loss of Signal indicator is activated when a LOS condition has been detected LOF The Loss of Frame indicator is activated when a Loss of frame condition has occurred SEF OOF The Severely Errored Frame Out of Frame indicator is activated when an Out of frame condition has occurred FAS The Frame Alignment Sequence indicator activates when errors have been detected in the A1 A2 framing bytes B1 The B1 indicator will activate when SDH Regenerator SONET Section parity errors have occurred TIM S RS TIM The TIM indicator activates when a JO trace is received that does not match the expected trace AIS L MS AIS The AIS indicator activates when the overhead and SPE are set to all ones for a user selected time B2 The B2 indicator activates when SDH Multiplex Section SONET Line parity errors have been detected RDI L MS RDI The RDI indicator activates when bits 6 7 and 8 of the K2 byte have been a binary 110 respectively for five or more consecutive frames MS REI REI L The REI indicator activates when a non zero value in the M1 byte is detected AIS P AU AIS The Path AI
87. EF 0A 25 1 p D7 FO 0B 26 D8 F1 oc 27 D9 F2 0D 28 D10 F3 0E 29 D11 F4 OF 2A D12 F5 10 2B 1 Fe z1 1 Zi ec 2 F7 z2 n2 2 pd E2 F8 13 2E Section Trace JO Length Expected taaa 16 Bytes Received ii LMS 4 0123456789 lt gt 28 ABCDEFGHIUKLMNOPORSTUVUXYZ 64 Bytes Test Control Measurements Synchronization Status 1 Analysis APS Meas Stval F6 Reserved i Compliance EA Figure 2 33 Signal Monitor Transport Overhead The Transport Overhead section displays the overhead for the selected STM 1 STS 3 The information presented on the screen is constantly updated To suspend the update click the Pause Update button The button will change to a Resume Update button and will say PAUSED beside it as shown in Figure 2 34 The display will not be updated again until the Resume Update button is clicked NOTE Pausing the update only suspends the local display updates the OTS9100 is still capturing data NOTE The title at the top of the menu reflects the overhead in the mode of the selected receiver not the notation selected through the options menu OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface RS Trace Section Trace J0 The Section Trace JO provides the current values of the JO multi byte trace The 16 byte JO Trace receives 15 bytes ending with a CRC The 64 byte JO Trace receives 62 bytes with CR LF The Expected and Received values are both displayed providing an easy visual
88. Enable register The query form returns the current value Syntax ESE ESE lt NR1 gt ESR This query returns the value of the IEEE 488 2 Event Status Register Syntax ESR IDN This query returns the identification string for the Tektronix OTS9100 instrument Syntax IDN LRN This query returns the current state of the instrument as a string of commands that will restore the instrument to that state Syntax LRN OTS9100 User Manual 3 14 Reference Remote Commands Command Description OPC This query returns 1 to indicate that any pending operation is complete Syntax OPC RCL This command recalls system parameter settings from the specified buffer The buffer specification is a number in the range 1 to 99 Syntax RCL lt NR1 gt RST This command restores all system parameters to their default values Syntax RST SAV This command saves system parameter settings to the specified buffer The buffer specification is a number in the range 1 to 99 Syntax SAV lt NR1 gt OTS9100 User Manual 3 15 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis G826A MS FAR This query returns the value of the specified Far End Multiplexor Section parameter from G 826 analysis of received data Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis G826A MS FAR lt Enum gt Parameter Description ETIME Elapsed time EB C Errored blocks EB_R Errored block ratio BBE_C Background block errors
89. Es MGMT RESUIlts AGE This command sets the maximum age of a file a delta of file creation time and current system time Files at this age or older are deleted on the next revisit as set by INTErval This command takes three comma separated parameters Days Hrs Mins The query form returns the current setting in the same form Syntax SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts AGE SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts AGE lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts COUNt This command sets the maximum number of result files allowed before deletion begins The order in which files are deleted is based on the sort criteria see the SORT command below The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts COUNt SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts COUNt lt NR1 gt SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts DESTination This command defines the path to the files to be deleted This command requires the full path including drive letter The query form returns the current directory path marked for deletion Syntax SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts DESTination SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts DESTination lt String gt OTS9100 User Manual 3 77 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts ENABle This command enables or disables each individual deletion trigger During the current revisit interval the enable flags are polled if an enabled criteria is met file deletion will begin and continue until all enabled
90. If Slot 2078912 oO an EEAS Stream Index fi al Edit Slot 2 Rx H OTSSIR2 1 IP Setup Signal oo POS Scramblin Qoos pasita i Gb s cS OLOF Expected IP Payload ar oo PRBS 2 31 1 O81 teat Sims OAls L O B2 0759251 ORDIL Synchronization QREIL Module 1 Oals P z OLOPP o OB3 OTS92T1 Jitter ORDI P Generator 1 ORELP 7 OTIMP El OUNEQ P Summary OPLM P OLsS Q Bit Error Sn LOCKOUT Thai SZ For Help press F1 e A a ad Figure 2 6 Receiver Setup IP Setup menu The Stream Index is fixed at a value of 1 IP Setup The IP Payload data gram starts with the IP header POS Scrambling can be set to ON or OFF via the pull down menu The IP Payload is selectable by the pull down menu The selections available are gt PRBS31 gt 16 bit Word user selectable If the 16 bit Word is selected an EDIT button and selection box is displayed 2 54 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Setup Summary The Setup Summary menu as shown in Figure 2 32 provides a summary of the setup conditions for each Transmitter and Receiver individually Clicking on the Turn Laser OFF buttons will turn the laser off Clicking on the Receiver Setup will display the Receiver Setup menu for the specific Receiver number chosen Clicking on the Transmitter Setup will display the last edited menu tab of the Transmitter Setup menu for the specific Transmitter number chosen Setup Summary OTS
91. LAPsed SENSe TRIGger MODE This command sets the condition that will produce a trigger output from the OTS 9000 receiver The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt TRIGger MODE SENSe lt slot gt TRIGger MODE lt Enum gt Parameters Description OFF The trigger output is disabled ANOMaly A trigger occurs when an anomaly is received DEFEct A trigger occurs when a defect is received PAYload A trigger occurs when a payload data error is received AD A trigger occurs when an anomaly or defect is received AP A trigger occurs when an anomaly or payload data error is received DP A trigger occurs when a defect or payload data error is received ADP A trigger occurs when an anomaly defect or payload data error is received SOURce CLOCk SOURce This command selects the timing source for the signal generated by the OTS 9000 transmitter The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt CLOCk SOURce SOURce lt slot gt CLOCk SOURce lt Enum gt Parameters Description INTErnal Transmitter timing is based on the OTS 9000 s internal reference EXTErnal Transmitter timing is derived from an external signal applied to the clock trigger card SOURce DATA BACK ground STRUcture This command sets the background structure of the signal generated by the OTS 9000 transmitter The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA BACKground STRUcture SOURce lt slot g
92. M2A FLOW lt Enum gt Parameter Description NONE No flow control is enabled HARDware Flow control uses RS 232 control signals SOF Tware Flow control uses XON and XOFF characters in the data stream SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A NDATA This command sets the number of data bits per character on the COM2 serial port The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A NDATA SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A NDATA lt Enum gt Parameters Description N7A Seven bit data N8A Eight bit data SYSTem COM Municate SERIal COM2A NSTOP This command sets the number of stop bits per character on the COM2 serial port The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A NSTOP SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A NSTOP lt Enum gt Parameters Description N1A One stop bit N1P5A One and one half stop bits N2 Two stop bits OTS9100 User Manual 3 73 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A PARIty This command sets for the COM2 serial port the function of the high order eighth bit in each serial The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIlal COM2A PARIty SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A PARIty lt Enum gt Parameter Description NONE No parity ODD Odd parity EVEN Even parity MARK The parity bit is always set SPACE The parity bit is always clear SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A
93. Multi Byte Trace JO Trace provides a capability to uniquely identify each of the multiple channels being carried in a Dense Wave Division Multiplexer DWDM system providing an end to end continuity check The OTS9100 has the ability to generate unique JO traces This allows test signals to be easily identified or to simulate network element generated traffic without the Trace Identifier Mismatch TIM alarm being generated The OTS9100 capability to display the received JO trace allows users to verify continuity and correct routing of individual channels within the multi channel DWDM system To analyze ensure the box beside the Analyze JO Trace Mismatch is checked To edit click on the Edit Expected JO Trace button A dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2 29 reflecting the current settings of the JO Trace Click the appropriate radio button to choose between No Trace 16 Byte Trace and 64 Byte Trace To input a Trace Value click in 2 50 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface the Trace Value box and start typing When the desired edits are complete click OK to return to the main menu In 16 byte the last byte is filled with CRC In 64 byte the last two bytes are filled with CR LF JO Trace Editor C No Trace 16 Byte Trace G 707 Hex Value C 64 Byte Trace GR 253 Trace Yalue Tektronix BTT Figure 2 29 JO Trace Editor dialog box J1 Multi Byte Trace J1 Trace provides a capabilit
94. NET analysis results for that selection The display reflects the available Near End and Far End error count analysis data as shown in Figures 2 48 and 2 49 The analysis data is explained in greater detail below ystem View Device Window Help s je ul Ala m a IJa On orfan Lasers tee IR b gt u fan Tests eae Signal Monitor oo OTSS1A1 10 Gb s Rx 1 ag OTSS1R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 OTS93A1 2 5 Gb s Receiver 1 APS Meas For Help press F1 2 74 aa z Analysis OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 SON SDH G 826 Test Complete Elapsed Time 00 00 00 rAnalysis Results Section Line C Path Section Line Near End Far End Count Ratio Count Ratio Count Ratio BBE E y o BBE E a w m g ES E y ow ES fi ow m g 1 ss of 0000 ss of om a 0000 us of m uss of on a 0000 CSES 0 CSES a a ESA y o 000 ESA E y um O p 0 000 ESB Cia 0 000 ESB tial 0 000 e mw Slot 2 OTSSIR2 1 Figure 2 48 Analysis menu SONET T1M1 Section Line OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Analysis OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 SONET TIM1 SDH G 826 Test Complete Elapsed Time 00 00 00 Analysis Results C Section Line c Bail Path Near End Far End Count Ratio Count Ratio BBE uw m y mw es of m o SES g uw a w uss of m o ceses d m a ea 0 ww ese mw es of ooo f o d000 F
95. NR1 gt lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt SOURce DATA IP HEADer ADDRess SOURce This command sets the transmitter IP header source address The query form returns the current settings The first parameter specifies the first most significant byte The last parameter specifies the least significant byte Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer ADDRess SOURce SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer ADDRess SOURce lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt 3 46 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA IP HEADer FLAG This query returns the transmitter IP header flag The value returned is formatted as NR1 parameter Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer FLAG SOURce DATA IP HEADer FRAG OFFSet This query returns the transmitter IP header fragment offset The value returned is formatted as NR1 parameter Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer FRAG OFF Set SOURce DATA IP HEADer ID This query returns the transmitter IP header identification The value returned is formatted as NR1 parameter Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer ID SOURce DATA IP HEADer PROTocol This command sets the transmitter IP header protocol The query form returns the transmitter IP header protocol Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer PROTocol SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer PROTocol lt NR1 gt SOURce DATA IP HEADer PSIZe This command sets the transmitter IP
96. NSES DATA OTR UCINE a r a a a hatha a Ee cobs a aa TaN 3 32 SENSE DATA TOH aa ae na a a aara a a n a aaan aaan a aaeain 3 32 SENSE NPU TARE S Nod ots sei od ees Sa oe eet odes A aA oe Tae 3 33 SENSE MEASUreZAPS Tim Gack seecteceth tick ccd aatecetevedie a aa a a a aAa ede 3 33 SENSe MEASure HDLC ieee n aaa a a a aaar A a nE a 3 35 SENSe MEASure IP PACKets 00 0 00ccccccccccccceeeccsseeeseeeeecsesuuueecesuauaeeeeeeaseeeuuaeeeevans 3 36 SENSe MEASure LINE CUMU lative 0 0 cece cceceeecesseeeesesseeueeeeeeeeesuneeeeevaas 3 36 SENSe MEASure LINE WINDOW 0c cccccccceceeecccseeeeeeeeeecesseeeeesseeuueueeeuaaeesenaeeeeeaa 3 37 SENSe MEASure PATH CUMU lative ccc ccccccccc ce cesseeeeccessuee sees aaeeeeeneeeesaas 3 37 SENSe MEASure PATH WINDOW ccccccecceecccseeeeceeeeeesseeeeseesaueueeeeaeeeaeeneeeeeeaa 3 38 SENSe MEASure SECTion CUMU lative ooo cece cc cecccsceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeesaueeeeevans 3 39 SENSe MEASure SECTion WINDOW 00 c cccccccccceeecceseeeesseeeescesuueeeeeeaaeeseeaeeseeeas 3 39 SENSe MEASure WINDOW ccc cece ceeecccc ee ceceseeeccceeeueuseseueueeeseeessesuuaeeeesaaeeeeuenseeeaa 3 40 SENSe OPTical INPUt OVERIO d cc cccecccc ce eecceeeeeeesseeeesessauueeeeeeeeeesanaeeeevans 3 40 SENSe OPTical THReShold AUTO ccccccccc ce eeeeeeeeeesesueesessseueeeeeeeeeuanaeeeevaas 3 41 SENSe OVERhead MONItor CHANnel cccccccccccccececessseeecesssueee
97. O nominal Optical Return Loss gt 30dB minimum Eye Crossing 50 typical Connector FC PC standard SC or ST available Optical Rise and Fall Time lt 30 ps at 20 80 Optical Extinction for Continuos LOS insertion gt 30 dB Remote interlock and key switch NA Should be located on user supplied external optical source Fiber Type Output Single Mode Modulator Type Mach Zender Lithium Niobate Description Primary output to device under test A 10 OTS9100 User Manual Specifications OTS91L4 13 OTS91L5 13 Signal Name 9 95238 Gb s Optical Output Data Signal Rate 9 95238 Gb s 100ppm Pulse Mask Compliance GR 253 SONET G 957 SDH Data Format PN7 scrambled NRZ formatted data in BERT mode unframed and unscrambled PRBS data Wavelength 1310 nm 20 nm Average Power 4 dBm minimum to 0 dBm 1 dBm typical Extinction Ratio gt 8 2 dB gt 9 0 dB typical Sidemode Suppression gt 30dB Optical Isolation 25 dB Eye Crossing 50 typical Connector FC PC standard SC or ST available Optical Rise and Fall Time lt 35 ps at 20 80 Optical Extinction for Continuos LOS insertion gt 30 dB This output can be locked out for safety as UL safety requirements specify using the front panel key switch or remote interlock Fiber Type Single Mode Modulator Type Electro Absorption Description Primary output to device under test Frame Sync Output Connector SMA External Termination
98. OF_ES Loss of frame errored seconds OOF_ES Out of frame errored seconds RSTIM_ES RS trace mismatch errored seconds OTS9100 User Manual 3 39 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe MEASure SECTion WINDow ALL This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SENSE MEASURE SECTION WINDOW query as measured during the most recent N second period The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSE MEASURE SECTION CUMULATIVE Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure SECTion WINDow ALL SENSe MEASure WINDow CLEAR This command clears the data in the sliding measurement window Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure WINDow CLEAR SENSe MEASure WINDow LEVEL This query returns the number of seconds of measurement data included in the current windowed measurement calculations Normally this value will be the same as the window size clearing the window data or changing the window size causes the sliding window to refill as new measurements are made Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure WINDow LEVEL SENSe MEA Sure WINDow SIZE This command sets the duration in seconds of the interval over which windowed results measurements are calculated The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure WINDow SIZE SENSe lt slot gt MEASure WINDow SIZE lt NR1 gt SENSe OPTical INPut OVERload 3 40 This query returns a Boolean value indicating whether or not th
99. PE lt Enum gt Parameters Description L1B Constant 8 bit data L16B A repeating sequence of 16 bytes 0 filled with CRC LI6FREE A repeating sequence of 16 bytes arbitrary format L64B A repeating sequence of 64 bytes space filled with CR LF L64FREE A repeating sequence of 64 bytes arbitrary format SENSe ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted VALUe This command sets the data byte values used by the receiver for path Trace Identifier Mismatch measurements The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE 488 data block These values may also be set by the SENSe ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted command The query form returns the current values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted VALUe SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted VALUe lt Block gt SENSe ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted VALUe STRIng This command sets the data byte values used by the receiver for path Trace Identifier Mismatch measurements The byte values are formatted as an ASCII string These values may also be set by the SENSe ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted command The query form returns the current values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted VALUe STRIng SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted VALUe STRIng lt String gt OTS9100 User Manual 3 25 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis PATH TRACe TIM This command enables or disables the inclusion of path Trace Identifier Mismatch errors
100. PROMpt This command enables or disables the user prompt on the COM2 serial port When the prompt is enabled the system prompts when it is ready for a command The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A PROMpt SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A PROMpt lt Boolean gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A RATE This command sets the baud rate for the COM2 serial port The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A RATE SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A RATE lt Enum gt Parameters Description R1200B 1200 baud R2400B 2400 baud R4800B 4800 baud R9600B 9600 baud R19KB 19 2K baud R38KB 38 4K baud R57KB 57 6K baud R115KB 115 2K baud 3 74 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A RTS This command controls the state of the RTS Request to Send control signal on the COM2 port It has no effect when hardware flow control is enabled The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A RTS SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A RTS lt Boolean gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A RXTERM This command selects for the COM2 serial port the character the OTS 9000 system recognizes as End of Input The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A RXTERM SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A RXTERM lt Enum gt Parameters Description
101. PTICAL IN heading will turn green when the Optics card detects an incoming signal Flashing Red indicates an optical loss of signal LOS condition and flashing amber indicates an optical overload condition WARNING The incoming signal must be attenuated to within specified power levels If the signal exceeds 0 dBm damage may occur Rx DATA OUT Rx DATA OUT provides signal interconnection between the system cards This output must be connected to the Rx DATA IN port found on the Receive card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable and DC block provided Rx DATA OUT Rx DATA OUT is a 10Gb s DATA Signal provided for jitter measurement This output must be connected to the 10 Gb s DATA IN port found on the OTS92H1 Clock Receiver Card using the coax cable provided no DC block is necessary Otherwise this output is normally terminated with 50Q 2 8 OTS9100 User Manual Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions 10Gb s OPTICALTRANSMIT ONLY EXTERNAL LASER L8 The 10Gb s Transmit only card Optics card with external laser provides an external laser interface for the OTS9100 system This L8 Optics card provides E O conversion and works in conjunction with the Transmit card which contains transmitter functionality for the OTS9100 system Figure B 5 shows the Optical Transmitter card front panel Module OK The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running On power up the LED first lights red then ch
102. R Severely errored second ratio ESA_C Errored seconds type A ESA_R Errored second type A ratio ESB_C Errored seconds type B ESB_R Errored second type B ratio CSES_C Consecutive SES periods UAS_C Unavailable seconds UAS_R Unavailable seconds error ratio SENSe ANALysis GR253A PATH NEAR ALL This query returns the values of all of the Near End Path parameters from GR 253 analysis of received data Ratios are returned as NR3 values other parameters as NR1 values The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSe ANALysis GR253A PATH NEAR Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis GR253A PATH NEAR ALL 3 22 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis GR253A SECTion This query returns the value of the specified Section parameter from GR 253 analysis of received data Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis GR253A SECTion lt Enum gt Parameters Description CV_C CV Count CV_R CV Count ratio BBE_C Background block errors BBE_R Background block error ratio ES _C Errored seconds ES_R Errored second ratio SES C Severely errored seconds SES _R Severely errored second ratio ESA_C Errored seconds type A ESA_R Errored second type A ratio ESB_C Errored seconds type B ESB_R Errored second type B ratio CSES_C Consecutive SES periods UAS_C Unavailable seconds UAS_R Unavailable seconds error ratio SEFS_C Severely errored framing seconds SEFS_R Severely errored fram
103. S This command controls the state of the RTS Request to Send control signal on the COM1 port It has no effect when hardware flow control is enabled The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A RTS SYSTem COMMunicate SERIlal COM1A RTS lt Boolean gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A RXTERM This command selects for the COM1 serial port the character the OTS 9000 system recognizes as End of Input The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A RXTERM SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A RXTERM lt Enum gt Parameters Description LF Line feed LF character 0x0A an optional preceding CR is ignored CR Carriage return CR character 0x0D an optional preceding LF is ignored OTS9100 User Manual 3 71 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A TXTERM This command controls for the COM1 serial port the characters the OTS system sends at the end of a query response The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A TXTERM SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A TXTERM lt Enum gt Parameters Description LF Line feed LF character Ox0A CR Carriage return CR character Ox0D CRLF CR followed by LF LFCR LF followed by CR SYSTem COM Municate SERIal COM2A DTR This command controls the state of the DTR Data Terminal Ready control signal on the COM2 port The query form return
104. S indicator activates when the pointer is set to hex 3FF for five consecutive frames LOP P AU The LOP Loss of Pointer indicator is activated when a Loss of Pointer condition has occurred LOP ALOP condition exists when ten consecutive pointer errors are received B3 The B3 indicator activates when Path parity errors have been detected RDI P HP RDI The RDI indicator activates when bits 5 6 and 7 of the K3 byte have been a binary 1xx respectively REI P HP REI The Path REI indicator activates when bits 1 4 of G1 are decimal values between one and eight TIM P HP TIM The TIM indicator activates when a J1 trace is received that does not match the expected trace The trace setup is explained later in this section UNEQ P HP The unequipped path indicator activates when C2 equals zero UNEQ PLM P HP The Path Label Mismatch occurs when the received C2 does not match the expected C2 PLM LSS The Loss of Sequence indicator activates if BER is greater than or equal to 0 20 during an interval of one second or if the test sequence and reference sequence are out of phase Bit Error TSE The Test Sequence Error indicator activates when a bit error occurs in the payload OTS9100 User Manual 2 21 Operating Basics User Interface LED Display Selection 3 The LED indicators displayed in the LED window reflect the status of each OTS receiver loaded in the system Choices may be made by using the pull down menu to sele
105. SOURce lt Slot gt SIGNal STANdard SONET SDH Parameters Description SONET Set module to SONET signal mode SDH Set module to SDH signal mode BERT Set module to BERT 3 64 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce TRIGger MODE This command sets the condition that will produce a trigger output from the OTS 9000 transmitter The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt TRIGger MODE SOURce lt slot gt TRIGger MODE lt Enum gt Parameters Description OFF The trigger output is disabled ANOMaly A trigger occurs when an anomaly is generated DEFEct A trigger occurs when a defect is generated AD A trigger occurs when an anomaly or defect is generated STATus PRESet This command initializes the Interface Status subsystem to a defined initial state Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB PRIMary SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB PRIMary lt Enum gt lt NR1 gt Parameters Description NONE The GPIB port is disabled SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB PRIMary This command sets the primary address for the GPIB remote control port A value of NONE disables the GPIB port The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB PRIMary SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB PRIMary lt Enum gt lt NR1 gt Parameters Description NONE The GPIB port is disabled SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SECOndary This command sets the secondary address for the GPIB port A value of NONE disables
106. STATus PATH LEDS This query reports the occurence of various path layer error and status conditions typically shown by front panel status indicator lights The response is an integer number representing the time of the most recent status change followed by strings identifying the active conditions The strings are listed in the table below An optional numeric parameter specifies a time value such that only events that occurred after that time are reported If the time parameter is not present it defaults to zero corresponding to the start of the most recent test Syntax SENSe lt slot gt STATus PATH LEDS lt NR1 gt Condition String Word and bit value AIS P AU AIS ais p Parameter 1 bit value 1 hex 1 LOP P AU LOP lop p Parameter 1 bit value 4 hex 4 B3 b3 Parameter 1 bit value 2 hex 2 RDI P all HP RDI all rdi p Parameter 2 bit value 1 RDI P 2 ERDI P Payload 4 ERDI P Server 8 ERDI P Connectivity REI P HP REI rei p Parameter 2 bit value 16 hex 10 TIM P HP TIM tim p Parameter 1 bit value 128 hex 80 UNEQ P HP UNEQ uneq p Parameter 1 bit value 64 hex 40 PLM P HP PLM plm p Parameter 1 bit value 256 hex 100 LSS Iss Parameter 3 bit value 2 hex 2 Bit Error TSE bit Parameter 3 bit value 1 hex 1 No conditions set none All parameters 0 Hex 0 SENSe STATus PATH LEDS HEXadecimal This query is an alternative form of SENSe STATus PATH LEDS It returns a time value and three in
107. STS 3c 64 x VC4 192 x STS 1 192 x VC3 Active Channel s The Active Channel s section controls the settings for signal structure and test pattern of the selected active channel s To set the active channel use the up down cursors or click the Set Channel button When the Set Channel button is clicked the bar for Active channel changes into an interactive menu Type in the text box to select the channel or click Set Channel to choose channel 1 Test Pattern Test Pattern allows the user the select a pattern to fill the chosen active channel of the internally generated 9 95238 Gb s signal The patterns available are gt PN15 PRBS 2415 1 Inverted PN15 ITU 0 151 PN23 PRBS 2 23 1 Inverted PN23 ITU 0 151 PN31 PRBS 2431 1 Inverted PN31 ITU 0 150 All Zeros All Ones gt Fixed Data 8 bit In order to use the POS testing capabilities POS must be selected as the Active Channel Test Pattern In addition POS must be selected as the Active Channel Test Pattern in the Receiver Setup menu VV V V NOTE To receive a POS test pattern the Signal Structure must be set to STS 192c OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface When Fixed Data is selected a button marked Edit Fixed Data is displayed To change the Fixed Data to a different value click the Edit Fixed Data button and type the new value into the text box beside the button In the Test Pattern selection box observe that the value afte
108. STem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A NSTOP lt Enum gt Parameters Description N1A One stop bit N1P5A One and one half stop bits N2 Two stop bits SY STem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A PARIty 3 70 This command sets for the COM1 serial port the function of the high order eighth bit in each serial The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A PARIty SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A PARIty lt Enum gt Parameters Description NONE No parity ODD Odd parity EVEN Even parity MARK The parity bit is always set SPACE The parity bit is always clear OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A PROMpt This command enables or disables the user prompt on the COM1 serial port When the prompt is enabled the system prompts when it is ready for a command The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A PROMpt SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A PROMpt lt Boolean gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A RATE This command sets the baud rate for the COM1 serial port The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A RATE SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A RATE lt Enum gt Parameters Description R1200B 1200 baud R2400B 2400 baud R4800B 4800 baud R9600B 9600 baud R19KB 19 2K baud R38KB 38 4K baud R57KB 57 6K baud R115KB 115 2K baud SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A RT
109. Secs Test Description Figure 2 39 Test Control Parameters dialog box The Test Duration section provides the means to set the length of the test if the Timed or Timed Repetitive tests were chosen To set the test duration select the desired test length time by clicking up down arrows in the Days Hours Minutes and Seconds boxes By clicking in the box labeled Test Description a description of the test may be entered When editing is finished click OK to return to the Test Control menu OTS9100 User Manual 2 63 Operating Basics User Interface Test Control Summary The Test Control Summary menu as shown in Figure 2 40 provides a summary of the test control conditions for each Receiver individually Clicking the Edit button will display the Test Control menu for the specific receiver number chosen Clicking the Start button will begin a test on the specific receiver number chosen Once the Start button is clicked it changes to a Stop button The Pause button is grayed out until a test is started then it may be clicked to pause a test Test Control Summary OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 Description Test State Complete TestMode Continuous Elapsed Time Os Start Pause OTS93RA1 2 5 Gb s Rx 1 Description Test State Complete TestMode Continuous Elapsed Time Os Start Pause Edit OTS92R1 Jitter Analyzer 1 Description Test State Complete TestMode Continuous Elapsed Time Os
110. Separator IV History Data Comma Tab m History Data Setup r Data to Include Time S ample Intervals with Zero Data IV Elapsed Time 1s Include I Time of Day Omit V Los r Data Start F LOF Beginning M OOF Cc 00 00 00 IV TIM S IV AIS L Data End IV ADIL End IV B1 IV B2 IV FAS IV REIL I Pause Events Figure 2 66 Configure Data Report dialog box OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface OTS System Event Printer Application This is an auxiliary application that runs on the OTS system to log receiver events defects and anomalies Events may be printed as they are logged if a printer is attached to the system or the list of logged events may be captured to a file or to the Windows clipboard Starting the Event Printer program The Event Printer is a separate application from the user interface To start Event Printer double click its desktop icon When started the Event Printer main screen is displayed as shown in Figure 2 67 Tektronix OTS9000 Event Printer 5 x Logging Cie C Display C Display Print Select Events Copy to Clipboard Copy to File Copy to Printer pen Ea Clear Figure 2 67 Event Printer main screen Logging Logging controls how events are logged The selections available are o Off Event logging is disabled o Display Events are logged to the application
111. System System Info clipboard indicating which modules are installed Remote Commands key word search field and About Tektronix license and version OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Tool Bar The toolbar provides easy access to different views and selections of the user interface The buttons on the toolbar provide a toggle between select server the LED window the module LED panel the system view the Navigation window the laser and test control bars and the SCPI output Each of these controls is discussed in further detail in later sections The Test Control bar may be activated via the View menu or from the toggle key on the toolbar LED MODULES LASER SCPI a is T o SYSTEM EE ENA 5 NOTE Changing parameters while a test is in progress may cause invalid errors LED PANEL SELECT SERVER e Laser Control Bar Laser Control bar Test Control Bar Ja On Lasers x ae At m amp All Tests on The Laser Control bar provides the user with software control over the laser Use the pull down menu to select which laser to activate or deactivate Click the On button to turn on the selected laser Click the Off button to turn off the selected laser Click the fh button to close the bar or use the View menu to activate the bar When the button is clicked the Setup Summary is displayed OTS9100 User Manual 2 15 Operating Basics User Interface Test Co
112. TS9100 User Manual 3 53 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA POH ALL This command sets the values of all bytes in the generated STS 1 1 Path Overhead data The query form returns the current setting There are 9 bytes in the data block For SONET these bytes are J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 Z3 Z4 N1 for SDH these bytes are J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 F3 K3 N1 Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA POH ALL lt NR1 gt SOURce lt slot gt DATA POH ALL lt NR1 gt lt Block gt SSOURce DATA POH BACK ground BYTE C2A This command sets the values of the C2 byte in the generated Path Overhead data in all background inactive channels The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA POH BACKground BYTE C2A SOURce lt slot gt DATA POH BACKground BYTE C2A lt NR1 gt SOURce DATA POH BYTE This command sets the value of a specific byte in the generated STS 1 1 Path Overhead data The byte selection is specified by three numeric parameters the first specifies the STS 1 number the second specifies the row number and the third specifies the data Because only STS 1 1 may be selected the first parameter must be set to 1 The query form returns the current byte value Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA POH BYTE lt NR1 gt SOURce lt slot gt DATA POH BYTE lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt SOURce DATA POH BYTE C2A This command sets the value of the C2 byte in the generated STS 1 1 Path Overhead dat
113. These commands provide control of the signal measurement functions Line parameters Section parameters Path parameters Windowed measurement setup APS measurements sense measure line cumulative sense measure line window sense measure section cumulative sense measure section window sense measure path cumulative sense measure path window sense measure window sense measure apstine Receiver Signal Analysis Commands OTS9100 module These commands provide control of the signal analysis functions GR 253 analysis Line parameters GR 253 analysis Path parameters GR 253 analysis Section parameters G 826 analysis MS parameters G 826 analysis Path parameters G 826 analysis RS parameters sense analysis gr253a line sense analysis gr253a path sense analysis gr253a section sense analysis g826a ms sense analysis g826a path sense analysis g826a rs Receiver Test Control OTS9100 module These commands provide control of test setup parameters 3 4 Test execution continuous timed repetitive Timed test duration Test annotation text Test start stop and run state query Test elapsed time query sense test mode sense test time sense test description sense test state sense test time elapsed OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Commands Overview Transmitter Commands OTS9100 module These commands provide configuration and control of the transmitter se
114. This manual uses the following conventions The names of front panel connectors and LEDs appear in the manual in the same format as found on the front panel label for example OPTICAL IN and Rx DATA OUT When the user interface is discussed all menus names tags and button appear in the manual in the same format as found in the user interface for example Enable COM2 and Output Pulse Trigger In reference to terminology the user interface may be set to either SDH or SONET references The user manual provides SDH terminology with SONET terminology in parenthesis immediately following the SDH version If no second terminology is present the terminology is the same for both SDH and SONET In reference to the instrument the following conventions apply e When referring to the four card 10Gb s system Optics Transmit Receive and Clock the name OTS9100 is used e When referring to each individual card the card name is used for example Optics and Transmit NOTE Some of the content found in this manual does not pertain to some instruments Depending on the software revision and the options installed some of the features described in these pages may not be available X OTS9100 User Manual Getting Started This chapter describes the preparation and initial setup of the OTS9100 module Also provided is a list of standard and optional accessories for each of the individual cards Product Description The Optica
115. User Manual Tektronix 4 OTS Optical Test System 10 Gb s SONET SDH test module 071 0855 05 Copyright Tektronix Inc 2002 All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Tektronix Inc 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive Beaverton OR 97077 USA TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Microsoft Windows 2000 Copyright Microsoft Corporation 1985 1996 Warranty Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with
116. a The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA POH BYTE C2A SOURce lt slot gt DATA POH BYTE C2A lt NR1 gt 3 54 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA POH DEFAult This command sets all bytes in the generated STS 1 1 Path Overhead data to their default values Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA POH DEFAult SOURce DATA RATE This query returns the output signal rate generated by the OTS transmitter Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA RATE Parameters Description G10A 10 Gb s OC 192 or STM 64 SOURce DATA SECTion TRACe This command sets the data sequence length and data byte values transmitted in the Section Trace JO byte of the Transport Overhead The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE 488 data block The query form returns the current settings Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe SOURce lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe lt Enum gt lt Block gt Parameters Description L1B Constant 8 bit data L16B A repeating sequence of 16 bytes 0 filled with CRC LI6FREE A repeating sequence of 16 bytes arbitrary format L64B A repeating sequence of 64 bytes space filled with CR LF L64FREE A repeating sequence of 64 bytes arbitrary format SOURce DATA SECTion TRACe TY PE This command sets the data sequence length transmitted in the Section Trace JO byte of the Transport Overhead The query form returns the current setting
117. al REGEN B1 and B2 bit values are regenerated from the transmitted data FORCE_THRU B1 and B2 bit values are taken from the received signal independent of the setting of this parameter FORCE_REGEN B1 and B2 bit values are regenerated from the transmitted data independent of the setting of this parameter SOURce DATA PATH OVERhead PASSthru 3 50 This command controls the source of transmitted path overhead data in Through Mode The first parameter specifies a path overhead data field the second selects whether that field s data comes from the received signal ON or is generated by the OTS transmitter OFF The query form returns the current setting for the specified field Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH OVERhead PASSthru lt Enum gt SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH OVERhead PASSthru lt Enum gt lt Boolean gt Parameters Description C2A C2 path label POH byte bit value 131 072 in ALL command F2A F2 POH byte bit value 524 288 F3A F3 Z3 POH byte bit value 2 097 152 G1A G1 POH byte bit value 262 144 H4A H4 POH byte bit value 1 048 576 JIA J1 path trace POH byte bit value 65 536 K3A K3 Z4 POH byte bit value 4 194 304 N1A N1 POH byte bit value 8 388 608 PAYload Payload data bit value 16 777 216 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA PATH OVERhead PASSthru ALL This command controls the source of transmitted path overhead data in Through
118. al IN connection accepts the incoming optical signal to the receiver This input signal must have a wavelength between 1290 nm and 1565 nm and must not exceed 0 dBm of power The green LED labeled SIG PRES under the Optical IN heading will light when the Optics card detects an incoming signal Red flashing indicates an optical loss condition An amber flashing LED indicates an optical overload condition N WARNING The incoming signal must be attenuated to within specified power levels If the signal exceeds 0 dBm damage may occur Rx DATA OUT Rx DATA OUT provides signal interconnection between the module cards This output must be connected to the Rx DATA IN connection found on the Receive card of the OTS9100 module using the coax cable and DC block provided Rx DATA OUT Rx DATA OUT is a 10 Gb s DATA Signal provided for jitter measurements This signal must be connected to the 10 Gb s DATA IN connector of the OTS92H1 Clock Receive card Tx Data IN Tx Data Input provides signal interconnection between the module cards This input must be connected to the Tx Data Out connection found on the Transmit card of the OTS9100 module using the coax cable provided Tektronix OTS91L4 MODULE ok Rx DATA OUT 502 Rx DATA OUT 02 0 Tx DATA IN WARNING Always avoid exposure to the laser beam Before power is applied to the OTS9100 module be sure that all laser outputs are either covered with
119. ameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSE MEASURE LINE WINDOW Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure LINE WINDow ALL SENSe MEASure PATH CUMUlative This query returns the value of the specified result parameter for the most recent test Ratios are returned in NR3 format other values are returned in NR1 format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure PATH CUMUlative lt Enum gt Parameters Description B3 C B3 errors B3_ES B3 errored seconds B3_ER B3 error ratio REI_C Path REI errors REI_ES Path REI errored seconds REI_ER Path REI error ratio AIS_ES Path AIS errored seconds RDI_ES Path RDI errored seconds PLM_ES Path Label Mismatch errored seconds UNEQ_ES Path Label Unequipped errored seconds LSS_ES Loss of Synch errored seconds LOP_ES Loss of Pointer errored seconds J1TIM_ES Path trace mismatch errored seconds PAYL_C Payload errors PAYL_ES Payload errored seconds PAYL_ER Payload error ratio RDIPAY_ES Path RDI Payload errored seconds RDICON_ES Path RDI Connectivity errored seconds RDISRV_ES Path RDI Server errored seconds OTS9100 User Manual 3 37 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe MEASure PATH CUMUlative ALL This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SENSe MEASure PATH CUMUlative query The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under the heading SENSe MEASure PATH CUMUlative Ratios are returned in NR3 format
120. ands control basic generic functionality and interface control functions Clear interface error status CLS Enable error status conditions ESE Query error status ESR Query identification string IDN Query all instrument settings LRN Query operation complete OPC Recall system settings RCL Restore default settings RST Restore saved settings SAV Remote Control Setup and Format Commands These commands provide commands to initialize the error reporting system get the error status from the previous commands query response command headers and keywords in short or long form and set binary block data format Initialize error reporting system status preset Get error status from previous commands system error Query response command headers system headers Query response keywords short long form system verbose Binary or hex block data format system format block OTS9100 User Manual 3 1 Reference Remote Commands Commands Overview Remote Control Port Settings These commands provide the GPIB Serial and network port setups as well as the serial and network port protocols GPIB port setup COM1 serial port setup enable baud rate number of data bits number of stop bits flow control mode parity RS 232 DTR line RS 232 RTS line COM2 serial port setup Network port connect address COM1 serial port protocol echo control prompt input terminator output terminator COM2 serial port protocol Network session
121. anges to green when the system has finished initializing NOTE If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing or fails to light at all call Tek service Optical OUT The Optical Output is a modulated version of the External Laser Optical Input The optical connector can be configured with field interchangeable shells FC standard ST or SC type The field interchangeable shells are easily removed to allow cleaning of the optical connector The LED found above the Optical OUT heading will flash amber for five seconds and then change to green when both the optical output is activated and the external laser is active The LED may also be green if the external laser is active even if the optical output has not been enabled NOTE If the LED flashes red continues to flash amber or fails to light at all call Tektronix for service WARNING Always avoid exposure to the laser beam Before power is applied to the OTS9100 system be sure that all laser outputs are either covered with the screw cap provided or connected to the appropriate circuit OTS9100 User Manual Tektronix OTS91L8 MODULE ok 10Gb s Tx DATA IN OC192 STM64 Tx Figure B 5 Transmit Only External Laser Front Panel B 9 Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions External Laser IN The External Laser In port provides interconnection for external fixed or tunable wavelength laser sources The connection
122. ar End Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End Count Near End Count Far End only Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End NOTE A501 through A508 are applicable only for OTS91R2 module cards SDH G 826 Regenerator Section Analysis EB A301 Count Ratio A302 BBE Count Ratio A303 ES Count Ratio A304 SES Count Ratio A305 CSES Count only A306 UAS Count Ratio SDH G 826 Multiplex Section Analysis A401 EB Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End A402 BBE Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End A403 ES Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End A404 SES Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End A405 CSES Count Near End Count Far End only A406 UAS Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End SDH G 826 Path Analysis A601 EB Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End A602 BBE Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End A603 ES Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End A604 SES Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End A605 CSES Count Near End Count Far End only A606 UAS Count Ratio Near End Count Ratio Far End NOTE A601 through A606 are applicable only for OTS91T2 and OTS91R2 module cards OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface History data H1 Time resolution seconds sample Number of samples in report period H2 History data selected fields from Sample time seconds since start of
123. are copied to the clipboard and can be pasted into another application or document from there by typing CTRL V OTS9100 User Manual 2 79 Operating Basics User Interface APS Meas OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 Test Parameters Condition Tested SEF Test Time Limit 100 msec Switch Time Threshold EW Copy APS Measurement Data to Clipboard uu Edit Test Paramet Selecting OK will copy the following information to the Windows Clipboard iii You may then save it by pasting it into another application or document APS time measurement results for OTS91R2 1 Tue Apr 23 15 01 19 2002 Stop APS Test Cop Condition tested SEF T Test time limit 100 ms r Test Results Switch time measured Oms Switch time threshold 50 ms xl Test Result B Switch Time D You may enter text to identify the test or annotate the results Switch Time Display Units C Sec mSec C Frames Conditions Found Status Button is lit P aa e leer eer ester Figure 2 54 Copy APS Measurement Data dialog box 2 80 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Remote Access Setups The remote control settings for selecting GPIB RS 232 and Ethernet LAN controls are located under the menu bar in the System menu Click on the System menu and select Remote Control The Remote Control Settings dialog box is displayed Across the top are tabs for GPIB COM1 COM2 and Telnet as shown in Figures 2 63 2 64 a
124. ath Trace J1 Length 16 Bytes Trace Tektronix BTT Edit J1 Trace _ Active Channel C2 Path Label Figure 2 16 Transmitter Path Overhead Property Menu 2 34 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Edit Path Overhead To edit the path overhead click the Edit button This brings up a Path Overhead dialog box shown in Figure 2 17 The dialog box displays the overhead bytes in pa heey white text boxes To edit highlight the J1 appropriate box and type in the desired entry To set the overhead back to its default state click the Restore Defaults Signal Transport Overhead Patt Path Overhead for SONET J B3 ak B3 C2 01 ce button When editing is complete click OK 5 G1 to return to the main screen F2 H4 Path Through Mode a When using through mode a number of the 24 Path overhead bytes may be overwritten as z5 the external signal passes through the ST module This is done through the use of the _Pestore Deft Path Trace J1 Cancel Through Mode selections available in the p Trace Tektronix BTT Path Overhead menu as shown in Figure 2 18 Ifthe box is checked for Regenerate B3 Length 16 Bytes Parity the receiver will recalculate the B3 parity and insert the new information into the overhead as the signal is passed through the module Figure 2 17 To disable B3 parity regeneration ensure that the Path Overhead Regenerate B3 Parity box is n
125. ating Basics Functional Overview Clock Trigger Tektronix The Clock Trigger card provides the reference clock sources OTS9163 for the transmitter and receiver functions of the 10 Gb s are SDH SONET module ok Figure 2 6 shows the Clock Trigger card front panel Module OK ERES MHE The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running On power up the LED first lights red then will switch to green when the system has finished initializing The LED will flash YELLOW if the clock s multiplier can not lock to the selected reference input This condition occurs when the input clock is not within specified frequency range Note If the LED flashes Yellow the 10 GHz input clock is missing or out of range If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing call Tektronix for service 155 MHz EXTERNAL CLOCK IN The External Clock Input accepts a 155 MHz clock signal which can be used to offset the transmit signal The input has an SMA connector and 50 Ohms termination 10 GHz TRIG OUT The 10 GHz Trigger Output provides a bit rate signal that may be used for triggering an oscilloscope to capture the 10 Gb s Output signal The output has an SMA connector and requires 50 Ohms termination for signal integrity Rx CLOCK IN The Rx Clock Input provides signal interconnection between the module cards This input must be connected to the Rx Clock Output found on the Receive card of the OTS9100
126. attern PRBS311 Inverted PRBS 2431 1 pattern ZEROs Constant zero data ONEs Constant one data USER Constant 8 bit user specified data LIVE Live data 3 52 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA PAYLoad BACKground PATTern UDATA This command selects the background fixed test pattern for the Transmitter signal The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad BACKground PATTern UDATA SOURce lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad BACKground PAT Tern UDATA lt NR1 gt SOURce DATA PAYLoad PATTern This setting selects the test pattern inserted as payload into the transmitted signal The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad PAT Tern SOURce lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad PAT Tern lt Enum gt Parameters Description PRBS15A ITU standard PRBS 2415 1 pattern PRBS15l Inverted PRBS 2415 1 pattern PRBS23A ITU standard PRBS 2423 1 pattern PRBS23l Inverted PRBS 2423 1 pattern PRBS31A ITU standard PRBS 2431 1 pattern PRBS311 Inverted PRBS 2431 1 pattern ZEROs Constant zero data ONEs Constant one data USER Constant 8 bit user specified data LIVE Live data SOURce DATA PAYLoad PATTern UDATA This command selects the fixed test pattern for the Transmitter signal The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad PAT Tern UDATA SOURce lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad PAT Tern UDATA lt NR1 gt O
127. b 4 Select Print directly to the printer and click OK OTS9100 User Manual 2 101 Operating Basics User Interface 2 102 OTS9100 User Manual Reference This chapter describes the remote commands that may be used to control the OTS9100 system and the OTS9100 module from an external controller The remote commands conform to IEEE 488 2 and SCPI conventions The OTS9100 system accepts remote commands over GPIB RS 232 serial links or a network using Telnet protocol The Commands Overview section organizes the remote commands by function in a simple command tree format The Syntax section provides an overview of IEEE 488 2 command formats the SCPI conventions and the data formats used by the OTS9100 system Readers familiar with these topics may find that it duplicates material they already know The Command Descriptions section provides detailed descriptions of the format and parameters of each OTS9100 system remote commands These commands are listed in alphabetical order and listed by page number in the Table of Contents Commands Overview This section organizes the OTS9100 remote commands by function in a simple command tree format Each main topic provides a brief description of the command set uses and then lists each command in that section For more detail on specific commands refer to the following section Command Descriptions which lists all commands in alphabetical order IEEE 488 2 System Commands These comm
128. box by the main status bar To unlock the server use the same procedure When one client has locked out others the lockout indicator 8 will be displayed If an operator tries to change a configuration parameter while locked out a warning dialog will be displayed The lockout control dialog box may also be accessed by selecting Server Lockout from the System menu If jitter is generated the Jitter Inactive status box will change color and change from Jitter Inactive to active If no jitter is being generated the Jitter Inactive message is displayed on a background of gray If an error insertion rate is active the status bar will change color and change from Error Inactive to Error Active If no errors are being created the Error Inactive message is displayed on a background of gray OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Test If a test is active in any module in the system the status bar will change color and the Test Inactive message will change to Test Active If no test is being conducted the Test Inactive message is displayed on a background of gray Laser Off If any laser is active in the system the status bar will change from Laser Off to a Laser On warning If the laser is not in use the Laser Off message is displayed on a background of gray Frame Grabbers Frame Grabbers indicate that a window within the interface is dockable or will float They can be vertical or horizontal each bar represe
129. characters long The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt TEST DESCription SENSe lt slot gt TEST DESCription lt String gt SENSe TEST MODE This command sets the way the OTSsystem runs a test The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt TEST MODE SENSe lt slot gt TEST MODE lt Enum gt Parameters Description CONTinuous The test runs continuously TIMEd The test runs for a preset amount of time REPEtitive The test runs for a preset time and then restarts SENSe TEST STATe This command controls the OTSsystem s execution of a test The query form returns the state of a currently executing test Syntax SENSe lt slot gt TEST STATe SENSe lt slot gt TEST STATe lt Enum gt Parameters Description RUN Start a test PAUSe Pause the test in progress RESUme Resume the test in progress END Stop the test RESTart Stop the test and start a new test STARTING A test is starting status query only STOPPING A test is stopping status query only SENSe TEST TIME This command sets the time duration for a test The query form returns the currently programmed time Syntax SENSe lt slot gt TEST TIME SENSe lt slot gt TEST TIME lt NR1 gt 3 44 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe TEST TIME ELAPsed This query returns the time since the start of the current test Syntax SENSe lt slot gt TEST TIME E
130. comparison of the JO Trace The length of the Trace is also provided as both expected and received values S1 Synchronization Status S1 Synchronization Status displays the S1 byte values The S1 byte values are decoded and displayed in ASCII format To edit the S1 byte go to the Overhead section of the Transmitter setup and enter the desired hexadecimal value The S1 byte display is only active when the overhead channel is set to 1 OTS9100 User Manual 2 57 Operating Basics User Interface Receiver Path Overhead The path overhead menu as shown in Figure 2 35 displays the current activity of the path overhead as monitored by the selected receiver The Path Trace J1 and the C2 Status provide additional information received Signal Monitor OTS91R2 10 Gbis Rx 1 Transport Overhead Path Overhead K1 K2 Decode Payload Path Overhead Zeal Channel 1 Pause Updat B3 78 gt c2 79 G1 7A F2 7B H4 7C Zz 7D Z4 7E 2 VF Signal Monitor OTS9I1R1 10 Gb s Px 1 OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 OTS93R1 2 5 Gb s Receiver 1 Path Trace J1 Expected PE 1 Received cdefghijklonopgrstuvuxyat aa aam ae a ae aa a aa n a me a a mene mene anne mene mane nace e 6 Path Label Status C2 Figure 2 35 Signal Monitor Path Overhead The Path Overhead section displays the overhead for the selected STM 1 STS 3 The information presented on the screen is constantly updated To suspend the updat
131. ct burst time click on the arrows or highlight and type in the boxes labeled Burst NOTE For these changes to take place the Apply Defect Setup Changes button must be clicked The Current Defect Insertion settings will then reflect the new changes To start the defect insertion click one of the buttons under Insertion Control e Insert a Burst Clicking on this button will inject a single burst of the defect type reflected under Current Defect Insertion e Start Continuous Insertion Clicking on this button will continuously inject the defect type reflected under Current Defect Insertion OTS9100 User Manual 2 39 Operating Basics User Interface Transmitter K1 K2 Decode The K1 K2 Decode menu as shown in Figure 2 24 of the Transmitter setup allows the user to edit the K1 and K2 bytes for Automatic Protection Switching APS measurements E Setup OTS91T3 10 Gb s Tx 1 Signal Transport Overhead Path Overhead Error Insertion K1 K2 Decode IP Payload IP Erro OTS91R1 K1 K2 Bytes 10 Gb s Rx 1 K1 00 Hex Request 0 No Request 0000 0000 Binary Request Channel 0 OTS91R2 10 Gb s Px 1 K2 00 Hex Bridged Channel 0 OTSg1T1 0000 0000 Binary Architecture fo 1 1 10 Gb s Tx 1 Made 0 Idle OTS91T3 Edit K1 K2 Bytes 10 Gb s Tx 1 OTS92R1 Jitter Analyzer 1 Figure 2 24 Transmitter K1 K2 Decode menu To edit click the Edit K1 K2 Bytes button This bring
132. ct each individual slot a Module Summary or User Selected Signals Figure 2 9 reflects the LED Window for each of the LED Display selections If Select Signals to OR is selected a menu with a check box list displays Choices made in this menu determine what the User Selected Signals will display Two user defined fields are provided as a means to label different test names The User Selected Signals display reflects all the user defined selections made in the Select Signals to OR check box Module Summary displays a generalized summarization of all LED states of each individual slot Selecting an individual slot from the drop down menu causes all the LEDs associated with the selected card slot to display Only the status of the selected slot will be displayed e Clear History us Select Signals to OR User Ia l polls I0 o m a 2 3 2 Selected Signals Selected Signals o Signal Qos Signal Signal Select Signal User Selected Signal Slot 2 OTS91R2 1 Slot 2 OTS31R2 1 0 Clear History 4 Module s Summary Slot 2 OTS91R2 1 Signal Present Signal Q Errors Slot 6 OTS93R1 1 9 Signal Present Errors Slot 10 OTS92R1 1 Slot Signal Figure 2 9 LED Display selection options 2 22 Signal Present Q Errors Slot 13 OTSSIR1 1 Signal Present Errors Module Summary
133. d SENSe lt Slot gt SIGNal STANdard SONET SDH Parameters Description SONET Set module to SONET signal mode SDH Set module to SDH signal mode BERT Set module to BERT OTS9100 User Manual 3 41 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe STATus LEDS This query reports the occurrence of various error and status conditions typically shown by front panel status indicator lights The response is an integer number representing the time of the most recent status change followed by strings identifying the active conditions The strings are listed in the table below An optional numeric parameter specifies a time value such that only events that occurred after that time are reported If the time parameter is not present it defaults to zero corresponding to the start of the most recent test Syntax SENSe lt slot gt STATus LEDS lt NR1 gt Condition String Word and bit value Signal Not Present optical los Parameter 1 bit value 1 hex 1 LOS los Parameter 2 bit value 1 hex 1 LOF lof Parameter 2 bit value 2 hex 2 OOF oof Parameter 2 bit value 4 hex 4 B1 B1 Parameter 2 bit value 8 hex 8 FAS fas Parameter 2 bit value 16 hex 10 RS TIM JO Mismatch j0 tim Parameter 2 bit value 32 hex 20 MS AIS AIS L ais l Parameter 3 bit value 1 hex 1 B2 b2 Parameter 3 bit value 2 hex 2 MS RDI RDI L rdi l Parameter 4 bit value 1 hex 1 MS REI REI L rei Parameter 4 bit value 2 hex 2 No conditions set
134. d for an occurrence of the specified parameter The search starts from the cursor location it will not wrap beyond the end forward or beginning backward of the data For the B1 B2 FAS MS REI REI L B3 REI P and TSE parameters one may specify a search threshold the search will find only intervals containing at least that many errors OTS9100 User Manual 2 71 Operating Basics User Interface Receiver IP Measurements When Measurements is selected from the Navigation window the Measurements menu is displayed If a Receiver icon is clicked the Receiver Measurements menu is displayed This menu contains four separate menu screens each selected by a tab These tabs Real Time Cumulative History and IP Measurements each display an aspect of the Receiver Measurement function The IP Measurements screen as shown in Figure 2 7 provides the measurement results of the HDLC Frames and the IP Packets Bytes E System View Device Window Help 218 x je i EON a 4 on ort All Lasers IE gt u fan Tests os E rey Measurements OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 Clear History Signal Monitor Real Time Cumulative History Slot 20TSSIRz Test Control m Receiver HDLC Frames Bytes Correct FCS frames 14530855 Slot 2 Incorrect FCS frames OTSS1R2 1 fr Signal 30 ign OTSsIR2 Aborted frames OLos 10 Gb s Ax 1 Invalid frames OLOF Runt frames l
135. d payloads filled with user selected test pattern Multi channel capability in a single mainframe Available in Transceiver Receive Only and Transmit Only configurations Electrical Offset of Receiver Decision Threshold Windows 2000 compatible user interface Easily switched between SONET and SDH modes Through Mode with Overhead Editing Error and Alarm Injection Direct user download of software updates GR 253 CORE and CCITT ITU G 708 G 709 framing Complete Remote Control via RS 232 GPIB and Ethernet LAN 10BaseT ports and scripting available with the implementation of the OTS Toolkit Interface to STE LTE and other test equipment High Output Power 1310 nm or 1550 nm Laser Allows Support for Multiple Receivers via an Optical Splitter G 828 G 829 B1 B2 and B3 Error Analysis SONET OC 192c and SDH STM 64c Format Signals Supported in a Single Module Interchangeable Between the Rackmount Benchtop and Portable Chassis Report Printout Capabilities OTS9100 User Manual Getting Started The OTS9100 meets the needs of development manufacturing and service engineers by providing the capabilities for e System interrogation and conformance testing e System Qualification e Manufacturing Production Testing e Manufacturing Test of SONET SDH and DWDM Network equipment e Network Integrity testing e Network Performance monitoring e Network Troubleshooting e Design Verification e DWDM Parallel Channel System Test e Mo
136. dule Test e Equipment Performance Monitoring e In service Monitoring OTS9100 User Manual 1 3 Getting Started Accessories Accessories included with the OTS9100 module are provided in the following list If you wish to purchase optional accessories contact your local Tektronix Representative Standard with each shipment Certificate of Traceable Calibration 119 6364 11 OTS9000 Software CD 063 3560 03 OTS9100 User Manual CD 071 1060 03 OTS9100 Installation Guide NOTE DC Blocks are provided for use in two instances only The first being one DC Block must always be connected to the OTS91R2 Receive Card at the Rx interface port in all OTS9100 modules see Figure 1 3 for cabling illustration The second is in regard to use with the Transmit interconnection when using earlier versions of the optics cards the OTS91L1 OTS91L2 and the OTS91L3 the earlier optics cards will require that a DC Block be connected to the Tx DATA OUT interface port DO NOT ATTACH A DC BLOCK TO THE OTS91T3 WHEN USING OTS91L4 OTS91L5 OTS91L6 OTS91L7 OR OTS91L8 DEGRADATION WILL OCCUR Each of the optical cards requires a specific set of accessories Additional items are listed by each card type below OTS91L4 Standard 174 4702 00 6 coax cable one included with shipment 174 4277 01 8 coax cable one included with shipment OTS91L5 Standard 174 4702 00 6 coax cable one included with shipment OTS91L6 Standard 174 4702 00 6
137. e click the Pause Update button The button will change to a Resume Update button and will say PAUSED beside it The display will not be updated again until the Resume Update button is clicked NOTE Pausing the update only suspends the local display updates the OTS9100 is still capturing data The listed channel refers to the active channel of the receiver Only the active channel payload can be monitored To change this display change the active channel in the receiver signal menu setup 2 58 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Path Trace J1 The Path Trace J1 provides the current values of the J1 multi byte trace The 16 byte J1 Trace receives 15 bytes ending with a CRC The 64 byte J1 Trace receives 62 bytes with CR LF The Expected and Received values are both displayed providing an easy visual comparison of the J1 Trace The length of the Trace is also provided as both expected and received values C2 Status C2 Status displays the received and expected C2 byte values The C2 byte value is decoded and displayed in ASCII format To edit the C2 byte go to the Path Overhead section of the Transmitter setup and enter the desired hexadecimal value OTS9100 User Manual 2 59 Operating Basics User Interface Receiver K1 K2 Decode The K1 K2 Decode signal monitor screen as shown in Figure 2 36 displays the received results of the K1 K2 bytes Signal Monitor Signal
138. e AIS MS AIS AIS_P Path AIS RDILL Line RDI MS RDI RDI_P Path RDI OTS9100 User Manual 3 33 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe MEASure APSTime DETEcted This query returns one or more values to indicate the receiver events detected during the most recently performed APS measurement Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure APSTime DETEcted Parameters Description NONE No conditions were detected LOS Loss of Signal OOF Severely Errored Frame Out of Frame B1BIP B1 errors B2BIP B2 errors B3BIP B3 errors BIT Bit payload errors AIS_L Line AIS MS AIS AIS_P Path AIS RDILL Line RDI MS RDI RDI_P Path RDI SENSe MEASure APSTime MAXTime This command sets the maximum time for APS switch time measurement The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure APSTime MAXTime SENSe lt slot gt MEASure APSTime MAXTime lt NR1 gt SENSe MEASure APSTime RUN This command starts 1 an APS switch time measurement or stops 0 any measurement in progress Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure APSTime RUN lt Boolean gt SENSe MEASure APSTime STATus This query returns the status of the most recently performed APS switch time measurement Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure APSTime STATus Parameters Description INVALID No valid result is available BUSY An APS time measurement is in process PASS The current APS time test passed FAIL The current APS time test
139. e Laser Control bar select the OTS91T3 10Gb s Tx 1 laser and click Off Use the key provided to enable the laser lockout OTS9100 User Manual Getting Started Emergency Startup Disk Instructions for creating an emergency startup disk can be found in Appendix D It is recommended that you take the time to do this simple procedure every time you change your system configuration Shutdown and Power Off If necessary it is considered safe to shut off power without prior shutdown steps However it is strongly suggested that a more orderly shutdown be followed To perform an orderly shutdown use the following steps 1 Close the OTS9000 application by selecting Exit under the System menu From the Start button on the Windows 2000 Taskbar choose Shut Down On the Shutdown dialog box choose Shut down the computer and click Yes Bes a When the Windows 2000 message It is now safe to turn off your computer appears turn off power OTS9100 User Manual 1 15 Module Operating Basics This section describes the OTS9100 module front panel indicators and connectors Front Panel Indicators and Connectors Figure 2 1 shows a complete view of the front panel WARNING Always avoid exposure to the laser beam A N Before power is applied to the OTS9100 module be sure that all laser outputs are either covered with the screw cap provided or connected to the appropriate circuit The front panel is made up of four differe
140. e Path Label C2 byte from the selected active channel in the received signal Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA POH BYTE C2A SENSe DATA POS SCRambling This command enables or disables the packet over sonnet scrambling The query form returns the current setting lt Slot gt is an optional number that specifies the module slot containing the device that is the target of the command if omitted it defaults to the lowest numbered slot containing an applicable device Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA POS SCRambling SENSe lt slot gt DATA POS SCRambling lt Boolean gt 3 30 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe DATA RATE This query returns the input signal rate expected by the OTS 9000 receiver Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA RATE Parameters Description G10A 10 Gb s OC 192 or STM 64 SENSe DATA SECTion TRACe This query returns the most recently received JO section trace type length and data The data bytes are returned in standard IEEE 488 block data format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe SENSe DATA SECTion TRACe TY PE This query returns the most recently received JO section trace type length Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA SECTion TRACe TYPE SENSe DATA SECTion TRACe VALUe This query returns the most recently received JO section trace data The data bytes are returned in IEEE 488 block data format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA SECTion TR
141. e for each frame containing errors It can be used as a means of triggering an oscilloscope or other test equipment The output has an SMA connector and requires 50 Ohms termination for signal integrity F SYNC OUT The Frame Synchronization Output provides a signal that is asserted to indicate the start of a frame It may be used as a means of triggering an oscilloscope to capture the 10Gb s Optical Output signal The output has an SMA connector and requires 50 Ohms termination for signal integrity 0C192 STM64 TRANSMIT Figure 2 5 Transmit Front Panel OTS9100 User Manual 2 7 Operating Basics Functional Overview 622 MHz TRIG OUT The 622 MHz TRIG OUT provide a bit rate 16 signal that may be used for triggering an oscilloscope to capture the 10 Gb s Output signal The output has an SMA connector and requires 50 Ohms termination for signal integrity Tx DATA OUT Tx Data Output provides a DC coupled CML output signal for interconnection between the module cards This output must be connected to the Tx DATA IN connection found on the Optics card of the OTS9100 module using the coax cable provided Note When connecting to an OTS91L1 card a DC block must also be installed 10 GHz CLOCK IN The 10 GHz Clock IN is the bit rate clock for the Tx Data Out interface This input must be connected to the 10 GHz Clock Out port of the Clock Trigger card using the coax cable provided 2 8 OTS9100 User Manual Oper
142. e optical power has exceeded its maximum threshold A return value of 1 indicates that optical power is overloaded while a return value of 0 indicates that optical power is at an acceptable level This command and query may be directed either to the OTS Optics card or to the associated Receiver card Syntax SENSe lt slot gt OPTical INPut OVERload OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe OPTical THReshold AUTO This command sets the auto correct option for the receiver set point control to either on 1 or off 0 When set with to the on 1 value the system sets the receiver point with its default value and disallows any further manual setting When set to the off 0 value the user can manually adjust the receiver set point The query version of this action returns the current setting for the auto correct value Syntax SENSe lt slot gt OPTical THReshold AUTO SENSe lt slot gt OPTical THReshold AUTO lt Boolean gt SENSe OVERhead MONItor CHANnel This command selects the particular channel of the received signal from which overhead data is monitored The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt OVERhead MONItor CHANnel SENSe lt slot gt OVERhead MONItor CHANnel lt NR1 gt SENSe SIGNal STANdard This command sets individual OTS9100 modules to the SONET or SDH signal mode The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt Slot gt SIGNal STANdar
143. eceeceeeeeeececeneaeeeeeeesesennaeaeeeeeeeeetsnnaees 3 21 SENSe ANAL ysis GR253A SECTION 000 0 eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeceeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeieeeeseaes 3 23 oENSe ANALysis PATIASHPPEM eaaa aeaaea laces add vetted aA aa a SEE EEEN 3 23 SENS ANALysis PATH HPUNE Q i anaana aa eaea iea aaeeea oa aaa aaea aba aaae aidia 3 24 SENSe ANALysis PATH LABEIEXPEcted 00 eee cceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeaas 3 24 SENSe ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPECted 0 0 ce ceceeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeenaeeeseenaeeeeeaaes 3 24 SSENSe ANALysis SECTIOnN TRACE oo eeececeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeesneeeeseaaes 3 26 SENSe DATA AUT Oscan STRUCtUre ccc cece cececeee ee eeseseeeeessauueeeeeeeeesuueeeeeeaas 3 27 SENSe DATA GHANIE lites ceetiniten evn doetvadoaeland a a e i aai Seiad otitis 3 28 SENSe DATA IP PAYLOad PAT Tern uo ccccccccceccccceeecceseeecesseeeessesuuaeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeeaaa 3 28 SENSe DATA IP STReam INDEX o oo c ccc cceecccc ee eeceseeecessuueesesusueeeeeeeeseesanaeeeesans 3 28 SENS DATA PATH IT RAGCG oso an l a a ate tinted 3 28 SENSe DATAIPAY Load PAT Term inaa a a a a 3 29 ESENSE DATAIP OM raene an a e a aa r eta te hid 3 30 SENSe DATA POS SCRambling aasseeeeessseessrnesserneessnessennessrnnestennesnnanecennneeeennee 3 30 SENSE DATAIRA E a E a a naa aaa iS 3 31 SENSe DATA SECTIon TRACO riein Aan nean r A N A A 3 31 SENSE DATASPE STUFFING nne a rei e edie nid a a e EAE canes 3 32 SE
144. ed BIP 8 B2 contains computed BIP Nx24 All other Line OverHead LOH set to 00H Path B3 contains computed BIP 8 The J1 byte is set to the 16 byte string Tektronix BTT The first byte of this string is the CRC All other Path OverHead POH set to 00H Through Mode 7 eSa BERT mode Generates an unframed and unscrambled PRBS data pattern Fixed data patterns of all ones all zeros or user byte are not allowed in this mode Random Bit Errors can be inserted No other settings or controls for example structure overhead and anomalies apply in this mode Non intrusive mode External 10 Gb s data signal is passed through the module without modification Intrusive mode Active Through Mode Allows overhead bytes to be overwritten while regenerating the received 10 Gb s signal Alarms and errors can also be added to the received signal prior to retransmission Several Overhead bytes in the first STS 3c or first 3 STS 1 s SONET or AU 4 SDH may be independently set as hexadecimal values in the range of 00 to FF The Al A2 B1 B2 and H1 H3 bytes may not be overwritten The settable bytes include JO E1 F1 D1 D3 K1 K2 D4 D12 S1 and E2 Clear text coding and dedicated menus for S1 Synchronization Status Byte and K1 K2 MSP Multiplex Section Protection APS Automatic Protection Switching bytes may also be overwritten The B1 B2 B3 bytes may be recalculated NOTE M1 may not be explicitly edited
145. ee LED panel views can be enabled from within the OTS9000 application the Module Summary Panel the Slot Signal Panel and the User Customizable Signal Panel Note The LED panels display Receiver information only When only one receiver has been selected from the navigation bar no user selectable signals will be available Click on the drop down menu for the LED panel to access the possible choices for the LED panel Each selection provides specific controls for the active LED The choices are Module Signal Slot Signal and User Selected Signal Each state is described below OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Module Signal Summary LED Panel Clear History E The summary of signal states for an individual panel The Module Signal ea Summary LED Panel provides a summary status of error signals for the Signal Present Errors active panel slot 6 OTS9I3R1 1 Slot Signal LED Panel aia Selecting the Slot Signal will display the LEDs for the chosen card slot oTsveni ai Signal Present User Selected Signal LED Window Boer OTS31R1 1 The User Selected panel displays the results of a User defined state a Present The user can select specific cards and display the LED states for all cards selected Multiple LED panel readings are aggregated into one uniform panel display For example an LOS LED will be lit or ON if even one out of a grouping of three cards has a loss of signal If al
146. eeeaeeesenaeseeeas 3 41 SENSe SIGNalS TANG ANG aen teas lh edtecn ddd sedic cdawieckesieesacadecueladcccanedscdensaanceabs 3 41 SENSe STA TUS LEDS aada a cecti ees inbtenddecuecededeebisad sepntaaddecoeidacsosthagtees 3 42 IN e AN e E A E E E EE E EA E E E te a EAE T velar 3 44 SENSE TRIGJE C MODE rastne tana rin a a a a a a 3 45 SOURCE GLOCK SOURCE Naive Ae i eee er ee ate a a 3 45 SOURce DATA BACK ground ST RUCtUrE oo eee ceenteeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaas 3 45 SOURCE DATA CHANMEG aeri taea a ltd dera ada dada RSA 3 46 SOURce DATA HDLC FRame GAP uu ccccccecccc ee cecceeeeecceseeeessauueeeeeeeesesaneeeeesaas 3 46 SOURCE DATALIP HEADEF Ss cietscccedti antes n uit iech eed linet as 3 46 SOURce DATAIIP PAYLOad PAT Tern cccccccceccccceeecceeseeeseeeeesesuauaueeeeaaeeseeneeseeeaa 3 48 SOURce DATAIIP STReam INDEX inna ia e a a ra a 3 49 ESOURGCE DATA TP ERAF Corinna a a a a heed 3 49 SOURce DATA POS SCRambling aeeseessseeesrreseerresssrnesrenneesrnnesnennesnnanesnenneetennee 3 49 SOURce DATA OVERhead PASSthrU aeeeeeueeeeneennsssrrrrnerinreriinnnrnnsrrrrnnrnrnns 3 49 SOURce DATA PARI ty LOOP ai e ee aa aen Sa aa E ai a 3 50 SOURce DATA PATH OVERhead PASSthru 0cccccccccccseeeecccsseeeeeseaeeeeseeeeeeeenaa 3 50 SOURCE DATA PA TH TRA OE icc a ae aa a aa aa aaa eian 3 51 OTS9100 User Manual Table of Contents SOURce DATA PAYLoad BACKground PAT TEI eccseeceesteeeeeeneeeeeene
147. eeeeeaes 3 52 SOURce DATA PAYLOad PAT TO vvcsicccccivecssceevecsadavercctnvsscotasesveledteavencsscvanceseeners 3 53 SOURCE DATA POF 2 2 2sk sfc eseit a tea a a a a aan 3 54 SOURCE DATAIRAT Be sisi cctetiet cones a tea sansetebtecas A aAa aaa 3 55 oOURce DATAISECTION T RACE wisi aes Sneha ae wanes 3 55 SOURCE DATASOURCE cee le ded tes De ici Sone da a Sa ett 3 56 SOURce DATA SPE BACKground STUFFING eceeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenaeeeeeeaas 3 56 SOURCE DATA SPE STUFO eraic iee a area R an ATARE EEE AEEA REAA EEA ERAAN 3 57 SOURCE DATA STRU CUE a E E A E A A A 3 57 SOUR Ce DATA TO a teach taste DR Ie a sacs eee RRE 3 57 SSOURCe INSErt ANOMALY ceeeeeceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeseaaes 3 58 SOURCE INSErt DEFECtHNaics te ie cee Ae ena ie tan 3 60 SOURce INSErt IP ANOMaly MODE 1 ccceeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeesaeeeeseaeeeeseaes 3 61 SOURce MEASure HDL aii halu aa a iar aeaa a e rai e eda r AR 3 62 SOURce MEASure IP PACKets ain a a a a iaaea 3 63 SOURCE OQUTPUtLASER a a a a a E teeth 3 63 SOURcCS QUTPUtLASERINFEO nana a a a a n A R Aa 3 64 SOURce OUTPut LASER INTERIOCKk c ccceseecceeceeeceaeeeeseeceeeeeaeeaseeeeeeneeeeanaes 3 64 SOURCE SIGNaLSTANdard pan a aa aaa iaaa aaa 3 64 SSOURCe TRIG MODE ecien E AEA A 3 65 ES TATUS PRE O O a n E a N a TANN 3 65 SYSTem COMM n icate GP Brnsnisiarane pa ta E A a a iN 3 65 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWOrk
148. eeeeeceeeeeees 3 11 Controlling Responses to QUETICS 0 eee ee eete eee e eet ee ee taeeeee tees ee tease tnaeeeeee 3 11 Chaining Commands and Queries c ccccccecceeeenneceeeceneeeeecsneeeeeseaeeessneeeessseeeeess 3 12 General RUS eit set eg feces pave diate a a a ee renga nae eee ese eae eset 3 13 Slot SpecifierSyicvei2 acca Leeann dM a Medd ed alee eee 3 13 Command Description wie cece cisccecccccetecss st cceveetdeeeewestiedeaeeed cvereetineegcerteeteensstanaecenteeees 3 14 PGES e lane fac Bart xd totic batt a a tae Wade teh a a adel ams tae 3 14 PEGE a a cotevaia te haben tears coceiase Seauat A E E R 3 14 PES s E E E E E FE sue E EE Geawat codes N ane Gua dekdatersenaaats 3 14 IDN e T A E sees ee eve E TO eee E 3 14 ERN a E ivan es eee ee 3 14 POPC EAEE TE AEE E E TA EEATT 3 15 PROM EET E EE AT T T EERE E EE EAT IEE 3 15 PRS arae onar a R Ae EE eE a e EE RAE EA EE E ERA A ETES 3 15 PAN ares E a E EE E A E EEE E E OA OSE RTS 3 15 ii OTS9100 User Manual Table of Contents SSENSe ANALysis G826AiMS ceeeeeceee see eeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeesnaeeeeeeaes 3 16 SENSe ANALysis G826A PATH ceccceeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesenaeeeeeeaes 3 17 SSENSe ANAL ysis G826AERS oripa ian Tear ee ee eaeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeseaaes 3 19 SENSe ANALysis GR253A LINE ccccceeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseceeaeeeeeeeeeseceeaeeeeeeeeeseesneaeees 3 19 SENSe ANALysis GR253A PATH 0 cccceeeeeee
149. efaults Figure 2 59 View Options dialog box J Show splash screen on startup Display Notation Since SONET and SDH provide different notation in regards to some measurements the display notation option allows the user to set the notation to their choice If SONET is selected then where applicable all notation will be in SONET If SDH is selected then where applicable all notation will be in SDH NOTE This switch does not affect the actual functionality of the module It affects only the notation on the user interface for viewing convenience If the Track Module Setting option is selected then the display notation follows that of the module setting For example if the module is set to SONET mode then SONET notation is displayed OTS9100 User Manual 2 83 Operating Basics User Interface Server System The server selections allow the user to restore connection to the server at startup and to change the quantity displayed in the recent connection list These server connections refer to the specific OTS system Display Configuration Display configuration provides two different display sizes 8300x600 and 1024x768 NOTE For viewing on the OTS9010 the 800x600 display is recommended Otherwise the whole screen will only be viewable with the use of scrollbars 2 84 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface System View A system view is available by clicking V
150. en inserting an anomaly in through mode the user must check the appropriate overwrite box for the anomaly type For example to insert a B1 or B2 error the Regenerate B1 B2 Parity box must be selected or the error will have no effect The list of available anomaly types is dependent upon the overwrite controls enabled Thus if no overwrite controls are selected the anomaly list will be quite short OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Defect Insertion The Defect Insertion section of the Error Insertion menu as shown in Figure 2 23 provides all controls for inserting defects The Defect Insertion Setup on the left side provides menus for defect insertion setup The Current Defect Insertion and Insertion Control on the right side supply information on the current insertion state and provide the insertion controls Defect Insertion Delect Inzartion Satup Curent Defect Insertion Type Los wos Burst oor Burst 1 usec Min Buret Time 1 vec Insertion Control Mex Burst Time 128 usec Iresta Buret Apply Detect Satup Changbe Slot Cordinuous Inserlion Figure 2 23 Defect Insertion of the Error Insertion menu To select the type of defect injected use the pull down menu labeled Type under Defect Insertion Setup The defect types available are LOS LOF MS AIS AIS L MS RDI RDI L AIS P RDI P ERDI P Payload ERDI P Server ERDI P Connectivity and LOP P To choose a defe
151. erface for the OTS9100 system and a broadband optical receiver The L7 Optics card works in conjunction with the Transmit card which contains all of the transmitter functionality for the OTS system The L7 Optics transceiver also works in conjunction with the Receive card which contains all of the receiver functionality and analysis capability for the OTS system Figure B 4 shows the External Laser Transceiver card front panel Module OK The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running On power up the LED first lights red then changes to green when the system has finished initializing NOTE If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing or fails to light at all call Tek service Optical OUT The Optical Output is a modulated version of the External Laser Optical Input The optical connector can be configured with field interchangeable shells FC standard ST or SC type The field interchangeable shells are easily removed to allow cleaning of the optical connector The LED found above the Optical OUT heading will flash amber for five seconds and then change to green when both the optical output is activated and the external laser is active The LED may also be green if the external laser is active even if the optical output has not been enabled NOTE If the LED flashes red continues to flash amber or fails to light at all call Tektronix for service Before power is
152. est 1 27 2 31 32 P Page Title 2 36 Parameter types and formats 3 9 Peak to Peak 2 36 Phase 1 2 3 Phase modulation 1 3 Phase locked loops 1 2 PLL 2 2 5 Power On and Software Initialization 1 18 20 27 Power Requirements 1 9 Power splitter 1 11 12 16 30 Power splitter 1 6 Powering Up 1 20 Printing Results data 2 46 Q Query format 3 8 R Range switching 1 1 2 Real time 1 24 2 28 RECEIVED DATA IN 1 14 2 23 Receiver Configuration 1 19 OTS9200 and OTS92S1 User Manual Index Receiver Setup 2 23 Record Type Codes 2 51 Recovered Clock Out 2 2 Remote Access Setup 2 33 Remote Control Settings 2 33 Reference clock 1 4 Removing Module Cards 1 9 Results File Management 2 41 42 44 Results Files 2 41 Results Viewer 2 43 44 45 46 RMS 2 3 Rx DATA IN 1 11 15 Rx DATA OUT 1 11 12 16 Rx icons 2 21 28 S SCPI 2 15 39 3 1 6 8 11 13 SDH 2 2 5 18 22 35 46 49 50 52 Search 2 30 SEF 2 18 Select Server 2 34 35 Settling time 1 1 2 3 Server system 2 36 SETUP menu 2 21 Shutdown and Power Off 1 18 SiGe chip 1 1 Signal present 2 10 18 Signal Rate 2 21 22 23 31 Sinusoidal signal 1 34 Slot Positioning of Modules 1 10 Slot Specifiers 3 13 SMA Kit 1 6 SMA male to BNC female 1 6 SMA male to BNC male 1 6 Software 1 2 4 6 10 20 SONET SDH 1 1 4 11 15 2 5 18 22 35 46 SONET GR 253 line analysis 2 52 SONET GR 253 section analysis
153. ettings SAV RCL system description setup System File Management These commands define the necessary settings to allow the system to delete old files thus preventing performance degradation due to lack of memory system files mgmt results System Signal Standard OTS9100 module This command sets all system modules to the SONET or SDH signal standard system signal standard Receiver Commands OTS9100 module These commands provide configuration and control of the receiver settings Signal standard Receiver input threshold Line rate Signal structure Active payload channel Payload data Generate trigger on anomaly or defect received Received signal status JO section trace received JO section trace comparison value J1 path trace received J1 path trace comparison value Path label mismatch Overhead monitor channel selection Transport overhead data received Receiver Optics OTS9100 User Manual sense signal standard sense input threshold sense data rate sense data structure sense data channel sense data payload pattern sense trigger mode sense status leds sense data section trace sense analysis section trace sense data path trace sense analysis path trace sense data poh hpplm sense data poh c2a byte sense overhead monitor channel sense data toh sense optical 3 3 Reference Remote Commands Commands Overview Receiver Signal Measurement Commands OTS9100 module
154. f property controls for Traffic IP Header Setup POS Scrambling IP Payload and Interframe Gap To edit the IP Header click on the Edit IP Header button Drop down menus included in this menu allow the user to set specific properties IP Setup The IP Payload data gram starts with the IP header The user can set the source and destination IP addresses The access to these fields is through the Edit IP Header button as described in the next section The identification field of each data gram contains a 16 bit number that is incremented by one for each The sequence does not restart but continues from one packet to the next The IP Setup area identifies the sequence and packet information POS Scrambling can be set to ON or OFF via the pull down menu The IP Payload is selectable by the pull down menu The selections available are gt PRBS 31 gt 16 bit Word user selectable If the 16 bit Word is selected an EDIT button and selection box is displayed OTS9100 User Manual 2 43 Operating Basics User Interface 2 44 The Interframe Gap is fixed at 16 Traffic can be stopped or started by clicking the button in the Traffic section IP Header To edit the IP Header click the button to display the Edit IP Header dialog box as shown in Figure 2 27 The grayed out areas of the dialog box are fixed data not selectable by the user The user can modify the information in the white boxes To modify the information click in the bo
155. for Cumulative Results Analysis Results and History Data The window title bar displays the file name the start time for the test displayed and the device whose data is displayed These screens provide the same information and controls as the Measurement Results screens in the TekUI Refer to Measurement Results section of the module user manual for detailed information of the data presented Results iewer data_1002_00_001 sum 10 Gb Rx 1 19 Jul 2001 10 19 5 x File Export View Window Help data_1002_00_001 sum 10 Gb Rx 1 19 Jul 2001 10 19 Cumulative Analysis History 10 Gb Rx 1 Test Start time 19 Jul 2001 10 19 23 End time 19Jul 2001 10 19 26 Elapsed time 00 00 03 Error LOS LOF SEF FAS B1 TIM S AIS L B2 RDI L REI L 2 90 r Measurement Results Errored Seconds Error Counts Error Ratios 0 af ooe Of OF ooe TOP 0 ooe SSS 00 oe Figure 2 65 Cumulative Results screen of the Results Viewer OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Selecting and arranging windows The Window menu in the ResultsViewer contains the usual commands to close cascade tile and otherwise arrange windows It also contains a list of windows for all open files and this list provides direct access to any window Printing results data All Print controls are located under the File menu The Print Setup option allows selecting a printer even when no files are open Pr
156. framing overhead and payload bits Errors in randomly selected SPE bits SONET mode only Errors in randomly selected VC bits SDH mode only OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce INSErt ANOMaly REPLicate B2A This command specifies whether a generated B2 error is replicated into all the B2 bytes of the frame ON or appears only in the first byte OFF The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt ANOMaly REPLicate B2A SOURce lt slot gt INSErt ANOMaly REPLicate B2A lt Boolean gt SOURce INSErt ANOMaly STATe This query returns the current state of anomaly insertion Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt ANOMaly STATe Parameters Description INACT Defect anomaly insertion is inactive SING_INACT One time defect anomaly insertion is inactive SING_DWELL One time defect anomaly insertion is active BRST_INACT Burst defect anomaly insertion is inactive BRST_ACT Burst defect anomaly insertion is active between bursts BRST_DWELL Burst defect anomaly insertion is active CONT_INACT Continuous defect anomaly insertion is inactive CONT_ACT Continuous defect anomaly insertion is inactive CONT_DWELL Continuous defect anomaly insertion is active SOURce INSErt ANOMaly TY PE This command selects the type of anomaly inserted The query form returns the current selection Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt ANOMaly TYPE SOURce lt slot gt INSErt ANOMaly TYPE
157. he value of the specified result parameter for the most recent test Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure LINE CUMUlative lt Enum gt Parameters Description B2_C B2 errors B2_ES B2 errored seconds B2_ER B2 error ratio REI_C REI errors REI_ES REI errored seconds REI_ER REI error ratio AIS_ES AIS errored seconds RDI_ES RDI errored seconds SENSe MEA Sure LINE CUMUlative ALL 3 36 This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SENSE MEASURE LINE CUMULATIVE query The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under lt SENSE MEASURE LINE CUMULATIVE Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure LINE CUMUlative ALL OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe MEA Sure LINE WINDow This query returns the value of the specified result parameter as measured during the most recent N seconds The duration N of the measurement window is set by the SENSE MEASURE WINDOW SIZE command Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure LINE WINDow lt Enum gt Parameters Description B2_C B2 errors B2_ES B2 errored seconds B2 ER B2 error ratio REI_C REI errors REIES REI errored seconds REIER REI error ratio AIS_ES Loss of signal errored seconds RDI_ES Loss of frame errored seconds SENSeMEASure LINE WINDow ALL This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SENSE MEASURE LINE WINDOW query as measured during the most recent N second period The par
158. his on the fly software feature some of the menus and abilities described in this manual may not be available in all systems since many features require a particular card installation In addition some of the menu screens may appear different from those displayed in this manual The user interface screen has a number of windows and bars that comprise the main screens of the software some of which may be disabled The next section Elements of the User Interface identifies each element on the main screen The sections following it provide supporting descriptions for each of these elements NOTE The user interface is a Microsoft Windows 2000 application Information regarding standard Windows 2000 functions is beyond the scope of this document For further information on basic commands and functions of Windows 2000 refer to the Windows 2000 manual OTS9100 User Manual 2 11 Operating Basics User Interface Elements of the User Interface The user interface has a number of windows and bars that comprise the main screens of the software Figure 2 6 identifies each of these elements The Navigation Window Test Laser Control bars and Status Windows may be disabled for more viewing space if desired Active Task Bar Laser Control bar Test Control bar C NN Menu Bar l System View Device Window Help Current Activated Card Identification Bar Clear History Tool Bar E i i SA lAa GB a LA on ofA Lasers
159. ically but does not end the module group Slot positioning with the CPU interrupting a sequence of cards will not affect the functionality of the OTS cards on either side of the CPU slot position s Empty slots or slots containing non Tektronix cards effectively end the module group When an OTS9100 10 Gb s module and an OTS9200 Jitter module are loaded within the same chassis the slot positioning must start with the OTS9100 optical card positioned in the first position with the rest of the OTS9100 module loading sequentially as described above the OTS9200 module must be adjacent to the OTS9100 Through Mode operation is only supported when the module has been loaded into slots 1 4 of the chassis and only when the modules are installed in the following order e Optics card is in slot 1 e Receive card is in slot 2 e Transmit card is in slot 3 e Clock Trigger card is in slot 4 If cards are not installed in this order through mode is not allowed as a Tx Signal Source NOTE If the slot positioning rules are not followed the module functions will be invalid The transmitter and receiver functionality depends upon the absolute slot position and relative order of the cards OTS9100 User Manual 1 9 Getting Started OTS9000 FAN 1 FAN 2 112131415161718 QMO 1123141516 Fiqure 1 1 OTS9000 with card slot assianment The slot assignments shown in Figure 1 1 show an OTS9100 module loaded into an OTS9000 chassis to s
160. icit byte edit for M1 Checking the M1 overwrite setting provides the ability to insert REI L OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface JO Multi Byte Trace JO Trace provides a capability to uniquely identify each of the multiple channels being carried in a Dense Wave Division Multiplexer DWDM system providing an end to end continuity check Since only the SONET framing byte plus JO are in the unscrambled overhead of the SONET signal it is possible to extract for display the JO trace to confirm channel ID The OTS9100 has the ability to generate unique JO traces This allows test signals to be easily identified or to simulate network element generated traffic without the Trace Identifier Mismatch TIM alarm being generated The OTS9100 capability to display the received JO trace allows users to verify continuity and correct routing of individual channels within the multi channel DWDM system Signal Transport Overhead Path Overhead Error Insertion K1 K2 Decode IP Payloa Overhead for STS 1 1 Z0 Byte L Al A2_ JO JO Trace Editor C No Trace 16 Byte Trace G 707 Hex Value C 64 Byte Trace GR 253 Trace Value Tektronix BTT Section Trace JO Trace Tektronix BTT Length 16 Bytes Edit JO Figure 2 14 Transmitter JO Trace dialog box To edit click on the Edit JO Trace button A dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2 14 reflecting the current settings of the JO Trace C
161. iew and selecting System View This view as shown in Figure 2 62 represents all modules currently installed in the OTS system The System View reflects the name of each card and its slot position This feature is provided as a reference for proper module installation and connections for multiple modules The screen may also be reached by pressing CTRL Y on the keyboard System View 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 OTS91 OTS91 OTS91 OTS91 OTS93 OTS93 OTS92 CPU CPU OTS92 OTS92 OTS91 OTS91 OTS91 OTS91 OTS92 L4 1 R241 T3 1 C3 1 TIT ORV 1 TIA Livi RI 1 Tia Figure 2 62 System View OTS9100 User Manual 2 85 Operating Basics User Interface SCPI Output The SCPI Output option is provided for use in programming remote commands To activate click on the View menu and select SCPI Output A dialog box as shown in Figure 2 63 is displayed which provides an echo for all commands performed via the user interface The commands are shown in SCPI format and may be copied from the dialog box into a text document OTS9000 Equivalent SCPI Remote Commands E xj MV Show Line Numbers Large gt gt i i Clear MV Always on Top ae Figure 2 63 View SCPI Output dialog box NOTE If the OTS system contains different module types for example OTS91T2 and OTS93T1 cards all shared remote commands must include a slot designation If the slot number is not included the system will return an error message
162. igure 2 49 Analysis menu SONET T1M1 Path The error count and the error ratio are both displayed when applicable The results are broken down separately into Section Line and Path results Each item of the analysis results is briefly described as follows CV Code Violations are counted per ITU T G 826 and GR 253 CORE specifications BBE Background block errors are the count of errored blocks during non severely errored seconds ES Errored Seconds are the number of seconds since testing was started or restarted in which one or more errors were detected Errored seconds are only counted during available time SES Severely Errored Seconds are counted per ITU T G 826 and GR 253 CORE specifications Severely errored seconds are only counted during available time UAS Unavailable Seconds are the number of seconds during which error performance was such that the received signal was deemed to be unavailable Transition into and out of the unavailable state is evaluated according to ITU T G 826 and GR 253 CORE standards CSES Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds are the count of consecutive severely errored second periods A CSES period is defined as a period of more than 2 but less than 10 consecutive SES ESA Errored Second Type A is a second in which a single anomaly was detected ESB Errored Second Type B is a second in which there was more than one anomaly but fewer than the threshold for declaratio
163. in a pop up window The following paragraphs describe the data available the formats and the process of configuring a file to contain the desired information The data Table 2 2 shows a sample output which reflects all possible fields of data OTS9100 User Manual 2 91 Operating Basics User Interface Table 2 2 Sample output of data from a test results file Tl Test File Info S01 File data _1022_00_004 sum S02 Start Time 9 13 00 5 00 2 PM S03 End Time 9 13 00 5 00 6 PM S04 Test Time Od 00 00 04 S05 Description ui Tl Cumulative Measurements T2 Param ES C01 LOS 0 C02 LOF 0 C03 OOF 0 C04 TIM 0 C05 AIS 0 C06 RDI 0 T2 Param ES COUNT RATIO C07 B1 0 0 0 00 C08 FAS 0 0 0 00 C09 B2 0 0 0 00 C10 REI 0 0 0 00 T2 Param ES Cll TIM P 0 C12 AIS P 0 C13 RDI P 0 C14 LSS 0 C15 PLM 0 T2 Param ES COUNT RATIO C18 B3 0 0 0 00 C19 REI P 0 0 0 00 C20 TSE 0 0 0 00 Tl Sonet GR 253 Analysis Section T2 Param Count Ratio A101 EB 0 0 00 A102 BBE 0 0 00 A103 ES 0 0 00 A104 SES 0 0 00 A105 ESA 0 0 00 A106 ESB 0 0 00 T2 Param Count A107 CSES 0 T2 Param Count Ratio A108 UAS 0 0 00 Tl Sonet GR 253 Analysis Line Near end Far end T2 Param Count Ratio
164. in the analysis of received signals The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH TRACe TIM SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH TRACe TIM lt Boolean gt SENSe ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted This command sets the data sequence length and data byte values against which the receiver compares the received signal for Trace Identifier Mismatch measurements The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE 488 data block The query form returns the current settings of these parameters Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted lt Enum gt lt Block gt Parameters Description L1B Constant 8 bit data L16B A repeating sequence of 16 bytes 0 filled with CRC LI6FREE A repeating sequence of 16 bytes arbitrary format L64B A repeating sequence of 64 bytes space filled with CR LF L64FREE A repeating sequence of 64 bytes arbitrary format SENSe ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted TY PE This command sets the data sequence length used by the receiver for Trace Identifier Mismatch measurements This parameter may also be set by the SENSe ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted command The query form returns the current setting of this parameter Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted TYPE SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted TYPE lt Enum gt Parameters Description L1B Constant 8 bit data L16B A repeat
165. ing user interface operation Syntax SYSTem LOCK RELease FORCE SYSTem LOCK REQuest This query attempts to lock the system interface ie to take exclusive control of the system for commands that change system settings set commands It returns 1 if the lock succeeds 0 if it fails Syntax SYSTem LOCK REQuest SYSTem SIGNal STANdard This command sets the OTS9100 system to the SONET or SDH signal mode The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem STANdard SYSTem STANdard SONET SDH Parameters Description SONET Set system to SONET signal mode SDH Set system to SDH signal mode 3 80 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem VERBose This command selects short or long form command headers in query responses The query form returns the current setting Long form responses are composed of the full header keywords short form responses use the abbreviated keywords Syntax SYSTem VERBose SYSTem VERBose lt Boolean gt TST This query returns a Boolean value representing self test results Syntax TST OTS9100 User Manual 3 81 Reference Remote Commands Command Description 3 82 OTS9100 User Manual Specifications This section begins with a brief description of the OTS9100 module Following the description the section contains a complete listing of the instrument specification The organization of this section is as follows e System Specificati
166. ing RDI L MS RDIJ will force least significant 3 bits of K2 to 110 3 Generating AIS L MS AIS will force least significant 3 bits of K2 to 111 AIS L is a signal with valid section overhead and a scrambled all ones pattern for the line overhead and payload B1 error injection inverts one or more bits in one or more B1 bytes B2 error injection inverts one or more bits in one or more B2 bytes B3 error injection inverts one or more bits in one or more B3 bytes REI L MS RED error injection sets M1 byte to indicate one or more errors REI P HP REJ error injection sets the four most significant bits of the G1 byte to indicate one or more errors 9 LOP error injection sets the H1 H2 pointer bytes to 63 0F for SONET and 6B 0F for SDH This equates to a pointer value of 783 which is over the maximum allowable pointer value of 782 10 AIS P HP AIS forces all ones into the H1 H2 H3 bytes and the entire SPE 11 RDI P HP RDI has four different defect types The RDI P defect forces the G1 byte bits 4 1 to the following values gt one bit RDI P 100 gt Enhanced RDI P Payload 010 gt Enhanced RDI P Server 101 gt Enhanced RDI P Connectivity 110 OOO ke The rest of the POH in the active channel can be set to the user selected values Error Injection Error Rates All error rates can be selected in the form X Y e Z See Table A 3 for maximum and minimum error rates Random Errors Err
167. ing second ratio SENSe ANALysis GR253A SECTion ALL This query returns the values of all of the Section parameters from GR 253 analysis of received data The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSe ANALysis GR253A SECTion Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis GR253A SECTion ALL SENSe ANALysis PATH HPPLM This command enables or disables the inclusion of Path Label Mismatch errors in the analysis of received signals The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH HPPLM SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH HPPLM lt Boolean gt OTS9100 User Manual 3 23 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis PATH HPPLM GENEric This command enables or disables generic equipment evaluation in the detection of Path Label Mismatch errors If enabled the detection of Generic Unequipped code 01 does not cause a Path Label Mismatch error The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH HPPLM GENEric SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH HPPLM GENEric lt Boolean gt SENSe ANALysis PATH HPUNEQ This command enables or disables the inclusion of Path Label Unequipped errors in the analysis of received signals The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH HPUNEQ SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH HPUNEQ lt Boolean gt SENSe ANALysis PATH LABEI EXPEcted This command sets the compa
168. ing sequence of 16 bytes 0 filled with CRC LI6FREE A repeating sequence of 16 bytes arbitrary format L64B A repeating sequence of 64 bytes space filled with CR LF L64FREE A repeating sequence of 64 bytes arbitrary format 3 26 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted VALUe This command sets the data byte values used by the receiver for Trace Identifier Mismatch measurements The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE 488 data block These values may also be set by the SENSe ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted command The query form returns the current values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted VALUe SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted VALUe lt Block gt SENSe ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted VALUe STRIng This command sets the data byte values used by the receiver for Trace Identifier Mismatch measurements The byte values are formatted as an ASCII string These values may also be set by the SENSe ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted command The query form returns the current values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted VALUe STRIng SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis SECTion TRACe EXPEcted VALUe STRIng lt String gt SENSe ANALysis SECTion TRACe TIM This command enables or disables the inclusion of Trace Identifier Mismatch errors in the analysis of received signals The query form returns the cu
169. int Results prints a report displaying all the parameters of the Cumulative Data and Analysis pages Print History Graphics prints a page showing the same information as is displayed on the active window s history tab Configuring ResultsViewer To configure the ResultsViewer click View and select Options An Options dialog box will appear in which the user may change the following options SONET or SDH conventions for parameter names Option to have Results Viewer automatically connect to an OTS system on start up Option to have ResultsViewer display the Tektronix splash screen on start up Exporting test data to other programs Results Viewer can export results data as either ASCII text primarily intended for documentation or delimited formatted ASCII text readable by spreadsheet programs Exporting text To export the test results file as text click on Export and select Summary text to File This option writes an ASCII file containing exactly the same information as the printed output of the Print Results command Summary text to Clipboard writes the same ASCII text to the Windows clipboard Summary Text Preview displays the same text in a pop up window Exporting numeric data Under the Export menu the Data to File selection writes a file of delimited ASCII data containing information selected by the user Data to Clipboard writes the same information to the Windows clipboard Data Preview displays the same text
170. ion Error T IP Payload E Error Type IP Payload Error pcg E ya IEN Error Rate 9 000 x 107 4 Max Rate Min Rate 1 000 x 10 14 Start Continuous Insertion Max Rate 9 000 x 107 4 Error Rate Rate 9 000 x 107 4 Insert Single Figure 2 28 IP Error Insertion Menu The Stream Index is fixed at a value of 1 The Current Error Insertion section is only available if there is an Error Type selected under the Error Selection area Error Selection The Error Type is selected by using the pull down menu The Error Types available include e None e HDLC FCS Error e IP Payload Error e IP Header Checksum Error Once the error type is selected the Error Rate must be selected Use the up down cursors or just type in the rate For the maximum rate click the Max Rate button The default setting for error type is None so before the Current Error Insertion menu is available an error type must be selected and applied NOTE The Apply Changes button must be clicked before the changes become active OTS9100 User Manual 2 45 Operating Basics User Interface Current Error Insertion The Current Error Insertion menu is only available when the error type applied is an actual error type and not the default no error setting The Current Error Insertion menu identifies the current error type and error rate selected If the Insert Single button is clicked a single error is inserted into the IP Payload If
171. is command enables or disables the operation of serial port COM1 as a remote control port The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A ENABle SYSTem COMMunicate SERIlal COM1A ENABle lt Boolean gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A FLOW This command sets the type of flow control used for serial communications on the COM1 serial port When flow control is enabled the receiver signals the sender when its buffer is full so as not to lose characters The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A FLOW SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A FLOW lt Enum gt Parameters NONE HARDware SOFTware Description No flow control is enabled Flow control uses RS 232 control signals Flow control uses XON and XOFF characters in the data stream OTS9100 User Manual 3 69 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A NDATA This command sets the number of data bits per character on the COM1 serial port The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A NDATA SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A NDATA lt Enum gt Parameters Description N7A Seven bit data N8A Eight bit data SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A NSTOP This command sets the number of stop bits per character on the COM1 serial port The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A NSTOP SY
172. is the module sub type for example the Optics card may be a Transceiver Transmit only or Receive only version Syntax SYSTem CONFig MODule VARIANT lt NR1 gt SYSTem CONFig MODule VERSion This query accepts a module slot number between 1 and 16 and returns the version information associated with the Tektronix module in the specified slot The string returned has the format Mnn nn Unn nn Dnn nn Xnn nn Fnn nn and contains major and minor version numbers for the module itself and its utility driver FPGA file and firmware Fields that are not applicable to the particular module are returned as 0 If the specified slot does not contain an OTS system this query returns an error Syntax SYSTem CONFig MODule VERSion lt NR1 gt SYSTem CONFig SLOTs This query returns the number of module slots in the system Syntax SYSTem CONFig SLOTs SYSTem DESCription SETUp This command sets a text string that is stored with the current system settings and which may be used to annotate or identify the instrument setup The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem DESCription SETUp SYSTem DESCription SETUp lt String gt 3 76 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem ERRor This query returns the next event in the Error and Event Queue The ESR query must be given before events occuring since the last ESR query can be read Syntax SYSTem ERRor SYSTem FIL
173. is view to ensure that all the cards loaded are visible Blue lines spanning across the cards represent the correct cabling for the configuration of cards loaded in the system The System View window is meant to be used as a reference for verifying cards and cabling a system It does not provide a means to determine live or dead cards 5 Click the Setup Category bar in the Navigation window and select the OTS91T3 10Gb s Tx 1 icon The Setup Property Page associated with the selected icon should display 6 In the Property Page window select the Signal tab and make the following selections from the pull down menus e Signal Source Internal e Timing Source Internal e Trigger Output Anomaly e Active Channel Signal Structure STS 1 e Active Channel Test Pattern PRBS 2 23 1 ITU e Active Channel 1 7 Select the Error Insertion tab and make the following selections e Anomaly Insertion Setup Type None e Defect Insertion Setup Type None 8 Receiver Setup In the Navigation window keeping the Setup Category as the active category always check the Title Bar of the Setup Menu to ensure that it is associated with the correct device select the OTS91R2 10Gb s Rx 1 icon and set the Receiver Threshold Offset level to 0 mV 9 In the Navigation window click on the Test Control Category bar and select the OTS91R2 10Gb s Rx 1 icon 10 Click the Edit Test Control Settings OTS9100 User Manual 1 13 Getting Started 11 12 13
174. l Test System OTS9100 Module set consists of a 10 Gb s SONET SDH transmitter and receiver The transmitter consists of a high speed OC 192c STM 64c SONET SDH digital signal generator feeding a 10 Gb s fiber coupled laser and modulator It is capable of generating fixed and pseudo random test patterns mapped into a set of sub rate payloads or one full payload rate The transmitter may also retransmit received 10 Gb s signals with or without alarm and error insertion via intrusive through mode capabilities Both transmitter and receiver support Unframed Mode The transmitter supports flexible generation of alarms and errors at SONET and SDH levels SONET Section Line and Path SDH Regenerator Section Multiplex Section and Path The receiver consists of a high speed 10 Gb s 9 9532 Gb s optical receiver feeding an OC 192c STM 64 c digital signal analyzer The receiver supports both SONET and SDH SONET Section Line and Path SDH Regenerator Section Multiplex Section and Path alarm and error detection and accumulation for subsequent software analysis with the ability to print out reports The standard OTS9100 module consists of one each of an OTS91L4 OTS9IR2 OTS91T3 and OTS91C3 card A mixed suite of optical cards provides the OTS9100 module with flexibility to test for different optical requirements The OTS91L4 Transceiver card is the standard optical card for this module The OTS9100 module will accept any of the OTS optical cards as a replace
175. l three cards have no LOS then the LOS LED would be OFF or not lit A fourth panel titled Select Signals to OR provides access to the User Selected panel Choosing Select Signals to OR from the drop down menu launches a Customizable User LED Panel menu Three Entry Fields are contained within the menu Panel Title Line 1 Panel Title Line 2 and a list of active cards with check boxes Panel Title Line 1 Enter the name or title to be assigned to a user defined test group Panel Title Line 2 Enter the name or title to be assigned to a user defined test group Select Signal Panel Combinations provides a listing of all available Receiver cards Choose a combination of cards by clicking in the boxes adjacent to the card titles to select check or deselect uncheck each available card The User Defined Panel displays the results of these selections Customize User LED Panel m Enter Panel Title Panel Title Line 1 JENTER TITLE 1 Panel Title Line 2 JENTER TITLE 2 r Select Signal Panel Combinations Slot 2 0TSS1R2 1 Slot 6 OTS93R1 1 v Slot 10 0TS92R1 1 WMSlot 13 07591A1 1 Cancel Clear History Select Signals to OR Slot 2 0T591R2 1 Slot 6 OTS93R1 1 Slot 10 0TS92R1 1 Slot 13 OTSS1R1 1 User Selected Signals Module s Summar The Clear History button is used to clear the current history History will begin resampling data starting from the
176. lexer Section parameters from G 826 analysis of received data The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSe ANALysis G826A MS NEAR Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis G826A MS NEAR ALL SENSe ANALysis G826A PATH FAR This query returns the value of the specified Far End Path parameter from G 826 analysis of received data Ratios are returned as NR3 values other parameters as NR1 values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis G826A PATH FAR lt Enum gt Parameters Description ETIME Elapsed time EB _C Errored blocks EB_R Errored block ratio BBE_C Background block errors BBE_R Background block error ratio EFS C Error free seconds EFS R Error free seconds ratio ES _C Errored seconds ES_R Errored second ratio SES_C Severely errored seconds SES_R Severely errored second ratio CSES_C Consecutive SES periods UAS_C Unavailable seconds UAS_R Unavailable seconds error ratio OTS9100 User Manual 3 17 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis G826A PATH FAR ALL This query returns the values of all of the Far End Path parameters from G 826 analysis of received data The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under the heading SENSe ANALysis G826A PATH FAR Ratios are returned as NR3 values other parameters as NR1 values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis G826A PATH FAR ALL SENSe ANALysis G826A PATH NEAR This query returns the value
177. lick the appropriate radio button to choose between No Trace 16 Byte Trace and 64 Byte Trace To input a Trace Value click in the Trace Value box and start typing When edits are complete click OK to return to the main menu In 16 byte the last byte is filled with CRC In 64 byte the last two bytes are filled with CR LF OTS9100 User Manual 2 33 Operating Basics User Interface Transmitter Path Overhead The Path overhead property menu as shown in Figure 2 16 of the Transmitter setup can be used to pass or change the 9 95238 Gb s signal path overhead bytes in the first STS 1 or STM 1 of the OC 192 or STM 64 frame respectively In addition the J1 Trace and C2 path label may be edited The editing procedure for each is described in more detail in the following sections NOTE Overhead data displays are in hexadecimal format All edits to overhead display must be in hexadecimal format Setup OTS91T3 10 Gbis Tx 1 Seu i Signal Transport Overhead Path Overhead Error Insertion K1 K2 Decode IP Payload IP Erro Path Overhead J1 sin B3 C2 01 G1 ak F2 H4 z3 ZA 25 OTS91R1 10 Gb s Rx 1 g j OTS91R2 10 Gh s Rx 1 a p OTS91T1 10 Gb s Tx 1 mj OTS91T3 10 Gb s Tx 1 m Through Mode M Regenerate B3 Parity Overwrite Incoming F J1 Trace Eez EIG H F H4 T 23 Hz BS M Overwrite Payload OTS92R1 Jitter Analyzer 1 Signal Monitor P
178. ll cause errors in transmission and receiver functions 2 Always be sure to clean both cable connectors and front panel connectors before installing optical cables A dirty optical connection can cause errors in transmission and receiver functions OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics Functional Overview Receive Analysis Tektronix The Receive card contains the receiver SDH SONET signal analysis functionality for the OTS9100 10Gb s SDH SONET one module Los Figure 2 4 shows the Receive card front panel DEFECT Module OK ANomALY The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running On power up the LED first lights red then will switch to yellow and finally to green when the system has finished Fx EVENT initializing NOTE If the LED remains red after the system has finished aog Rx initializing call Tektronix for service LOS The LOS Loss of Signal LED indicator can be off red or yellow This indicator will turn red when the receiver detects a Loss of signal condition Once the receiver regains the signal the LOS indicator will turn to yellow and remain yellow until a new test is started the module is powered off or the receiver detects another Loss of signal condition A yellow history indicator signifies that LOS has occurred since the most recent test started but is not currently detected The LOS indicator will turn off when a new test is started
179. lock error ratio ES _C Errored seconds ES_R Errored second ratio SES C Severely errored seconds SES_R Severely errored second ratio CSES_C Consecutive SES periods UAS_C Unavailable seconds UAS_R Unavailable seconds error ratio SENSe ANALysis G826A RS ALL This query returns the values of all of the Regenerator Section parameters from G 826 analysis of received data The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSe ANALysis G826A RS Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis G826A RS ALL SENSe ANALysis GR253A LINE FAR This query returns the value of the specified Far End Line parameter from GR 253 analysis of received data Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis GR253A LINE FAR lt Enum gt Parameters Description CV_C CV Count CV_R CV Count Ratio BBE_C Background block errors BBE_R Background block error ratio ES _C Errored seconds ES_R Errored second ratio SES C Severely errored seconds SES_R Severely errored second ratio ESA_C Errored seconds type A ESA_R Errored second type A ratio ESB_C Errored seconds type B ESB_R Errored second type B ratio CSES_C Consecutive SES periods UAS_C Unavailable seconds UAS_R Unavailable seconds error ratio OTS9100 User Manual 3 19 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis GR253A LINE FAR ALL This query returns the values of all of the Far End Line parameters from GR 253 analysis of received data The parameters are returned in
180. lude restore minimize maximize and close Menu Bar The Menu provides the access to System controls and System View Device Window Help functions Views Device controls and functions Window and Help functions The Menu bar contains the control menus for System View Device Window and Help The Menu Bar controls can also be accessed by clicking on the Select Server Ctrl S Save Server Settings Recall Server Settings buttons found in the Tool Bar that correspond The Server Lockout corresponding button is shown beside each menu selection Sianal Standard gt System Remote Control The System menu provides the user with access to system Results File Management level functions The functions accessed through the System selection are Select Server Save Server Settings Recall Server Settings Server Lockout Signal Standard choose SONET or SDH Remote Control Results File Management and Exit Exit View The View menu allows the user to control which toolbars will be activated in the working window framework The functions accessed through the View selection are Navigation Window Tool Bar LED window LED Panel Laser Control Bar Test Control Bar SCPI System View Test Results Files Toolbars and Options Device The Device menu access the controls used for the selected device The controls used for the device are Setup Signal Monitor Test Control Measurements Analysis APS Measu
181. m gt Parameters Description INTErnal The payload data comes from the internal test pattern generator THRU Through mode the transmitted data comes from the receiver SOURce DATA SPE BACK ground STUFfing This command controls the SPE fixed byte stuffing in non active STS 1 channels When enabled columns 30 and 59 of the background channels contain the fixed byte value zero and are not used for payload This command is applicable when the background channel structure is set to STS 1 When disabled columns 30 and 59 are part of the background payload The query form returns the current setting lt Slot gt is an optional number that specifies the module slot containing the device that is the target of the command if omitted it defaults to the lowest numbered slot containing an applicable device Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA SPE BACKground STUFfing SOURce lt slot gt DATA SPE BACKground STUFfing lt Boolean gt 3 56 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA SPE STUFfing This command controls the SPE fixed byte stuffing When enabled columns 30 and 59 of the active STS 1 channel contain the fixed byte value zero and are not used for payload When disabled columns 30 and 59 are part of the payload This command is applicable when the active channel structure is set to STS 1 The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA SPE STUFfing SOURce lt slot gt
182. mally terminated with 50Q OTS9100 User Manual B 3 Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions 10 Gb s TRANSMIT ONLY OPTICS CARD rd end L5 15 L5 13 Q MODULE g MODULE The 10Gb s Optical Transmit only card is available with two laser options 1310 nm or 1550 nm This Optics card performs E O conversion and works in conjunction with the Transmit card which contains transmitter functionality for the OTS9100 system 10Gb s 10Gb s Figure B 2 shows the Transmitter Optics card front panels Module OK The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running On power up the LED first lights red then changes to green when the system has finished initializing NOTE If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing or fails to light at all call Tek service Optical OUT The Optical Output emits an optical data signal at a wavelength of 1310 nm or 1550 nm with the proper option The optical connector can be y C configured with field interchangeable shells FC standard ST or SC type The field interchangeable shells are easily removed to allow easy cleaning of the connector interface The LED located above the Optical OUT heading will flash amber for five seconds and then turn green when the laser is activated Tx DATA IN Tx DATA IN NOTE If the LED flashes red continues to flash amber or fails to light at all call Tektronix for service eee oa O O
183. ment Results Error Errored Seconds Error Counts Error Ratios LOS E g LOF Eh SEE E FAS o o f o UF 000024000 BI o o WF CO 000084000 TIM S o 0 AIS L E i B2 o o o o O 0000 000 RDI L a REIL D o f o O 0000000 Figure 2 44 Cumulative Measurements Display Section and Line OTS9100 User Manual 2 67 Operating Basics User Interface Figure 2 45 Cumulative Measurements Display Path 2 68 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Receiver History The history display shows the results history data collected by the associated receiver during the current or most recent test as shown in Figures 2 46 and 2 47 The selections for display choices are Section Line and Path Measurements OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 fe Any Count exceeds Figure 2 46 Example of Results History Data Section Line OTS9100 User Manual 2 69 Operating Basics User Interface Measurements OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 Real Time Cumulative History IP Measurements r Display AIS P C Section Line LOP P Test 9 i B3 No Data RDI P Search ERDI P P Parameter FROS ERDI P C fany z REI P NO DATA TIM P Prev Next UNEQ P PLM P Any LSS Count exceeds BIT fi Zoom a In lt eS Vv a Update Detail View Time Axis 1 sec tick Cursor Data at Parameter FAS bi No Data Linear C Logarithmic NO DATA r Time Axis Elapsed Time C Time of Day Figure 2 47 Example of Results Histo
184. ment for the OTS91L4 expanding the range of the system to support different types of test analysis The only requirement is that the optics card be placed in the first slot position within the OTS9100 module Optical card offerings consist of the following OTS91L4 Transceiver with 1550 nm or 1310 nm laser option OTS91L5 Transmitter with 1550 nm or 1310 nm laser option OTS91L6 Receiver Only OTS91L7 Transceiver with External Laser Interface does not include an internal laser OTS91L8 Transmit Only with External Laser Interface does not include an internal laser OTS9100 User Manual 1 1 Getting Started OTS9100 Features and Capabilities 1 2 OC 192 SONET Section Line and Path Testing B1 B2 B3 REI L REI P and random bit Error Generation B1 B2 B3 REI L REI P Error Measurement Section Line and Path Alarm Generation JO J1 byte and sequence Capture JO J1 Edit Section Line and Path Alarm Detection Section Line and Path Alarm and Error Generation STS1 STS3c STS12c STS48c STS192c structured payloads filled with user selected test pattern STM 64 SDH Regenerator Section and Multiplex Section Testing B1 B2 B3 MS REI HP REI and random bit Error Generation B1 B2 B3 MS REI HP REI Error Measurement RS MS and Path Alarm Generation JO J1 byte and sequence Capture JO J1 Edit RS MS and Path Alarm Detection RS MS and Path Layer Alarm Error Generation VC 3 VC 4 4c VC 4 16c VC 4 64c structure
185. n for Symbolic or Hex hexadecimal Type in the text box by the Hex heading to input a new value or click on the Symbolic button and click on the pull down menu The values available from the pull down menu are 2 52 00 Unequipped 01 Equipped Nonspecific 02 VT Structured STS 1 SPE 03 Locked VT Mode 04 Asynchronous Mapping for DS3 12 Asynchronous Mapping for DS4NA 13 Mapping for ATM 14 Mapping for DQDB 15 Asynchronous Mapping for FDDI 16 HDLC Over SONET Mapping FE O 181 Test Signal TSS1 to TSS3 Mapping FF Reserved OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface HPPLM and HP Unequipped Detection If Anaylysis Path Label Mismatch box is checked the Detect any Mismatch and Detect Signal Label Mismatch per GR253 Table 6 2 boxes are enabled and Path Label Mismatch is analyzed otherwise the boxes are disabled and Label Mismatch will not be analyzed For the HP Unequipped Detection section if the box is checked the Unequipped High Path is analyzed OTS9100 User Manual 2 53 Operating Basics User Interface Receiver IP Setup The IP Setup menu of the Receiver setup as shown in Figure 2 6 provides the IP setup information Each of the selections available is described in more detail in the following sections B System View Device Window Help laix e E ENA E a On Off All Lasers vf oe IR b gt m All Tests Ale N E Signal Trace Mismatch
186. n of a Severely Errored Second OTS9100 User Manual 2 75 Operating Basics User Interface Analysis SDH G 826 The SDH G 826 menu has two selections on the top for Analysis Results RS MS and Path Click either choice to display the SDH analysis results for the selection The display reflects the available Near End and Far End error count analysis data as shown in Figures 2 50 and 2 51 The analysis data is explained in greater detail below Analysis OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 Figure 2 50 Analysis menu SDH G 826 RS MS 2 76 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Analysis OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 SONET TIM1 SDH G826 Test Complete Elapsed Time 00 00 00 Analysis Results C RS MS H Path Near End Far End Count Ratio Count Ratio Figure 2 51 Analysis menu SDH G 826 Path The error count and the error ratio are both displayed when applicable The results are broken down separately into Section Line and Path results Each item of the analysis results is briefly described as follows EB Errored Blocks are counted per ITU T G 826 and GR 253 CORE specifications BBE Background block errors are the count of errored blocks during non severely errored seconds ES Errored Seconds are the number of seconds since testing was started or restarted in which one or more errors were detected Errored seconds are only counted during available time SES Severely E
187. nal interconnection between the module cards This input must be connected to the Rx DATA OUT connection found on the Optics card of the OTS9100 module using the coax cable and DC block provided Rx Clock OUT The Rx Clock Output provides signal interconnection between the module cards This output must be connected to the Rx Clock Input found on the Clock Trigger card of the OTS9100 module using the coax cable provided 2 6 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics Functional Overview Transmit Generation The Transmit card of the OTS9100 module contains all of the Tektronix transmitter functionality for the 10Gb s SDH SONET module OTS91 3 Figure 2 5 shows the Transmit card front panel Cpr ae Module OK The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running On power up the LED first lights red then will switch to green when the system has finished initializing The LED will flash YELLOW if one or more internal clock Tx circuits can not lock to the 10GHz clock input This condition ee occurs when the input clock is not within specified frequency O range a F SYNC OUT Note If the LED flashes Yellow the 10 GHz input clock is missing or out of range If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing call Tektronix for service Tx EVENT OUT The Tx Event Output is user activated and provides an active HIGH for each alarm or error condition generated The output will provide a single puls
188. nal through the module in two ways non intrusive and intrusive Non intrusive will output an unmodified external signal Intrusive allows the user to modify some aspects of the external signal as it passes through the module To set the Overhead bytes available for overwriting refer to the Transport Overhead or Path Overhead screens NOTE As described in Getting Started if the modules are not installed into the proper slots Through Mode is not available as a signal source option Timing Source The timing source pull down menu selects either internal or external timing Internal timing uses the internal clock External timing uses the External 155 Clock In connection on the Clock Trig module Trigger Output The Trigger Output allows the user to select what condition activates the output trigger Check the appropriate box for Anomaly Trigger or Defect trigger or activate both The triggering on defects provides an active HIGH for each frame in which a defect is inserted The triggering on anomalies provides an active HIGH for each frame in which an anomaly is inserted Active Channel s The Active Channel s section controls the settings for signal structure and test pattern of the selected active channel s To set the active channel use the up down cursors or click the Set Channel button When the Set Channel button is clicked the bar for Active channel changes into an interactive menu Type in the text box to select the channel
189. nd 2 65 To set up the proper configurations for the type of remote access desired select the appropriate setup information via the pull down menus and boxes provided Remote Control Settings Figure 2 63 GPIB Remote Control Settings Remote Control Settings ok Epply Figure 2 56 COM 1 COM 2 Remote Control Settings OTS9100 User Manual 2 81 Operating Basics User Interface Remote Control Settings Figure 2 57 Telnet network Remote Control Settings Select Server The select server dialog box as shown in Figure 2 58 allows the user to select the server when the OTS system is networked If there are no networks available the only selection is LocalServer Select Tektronix Measurement Server Figure 2 58 Select Server dialog box 2 82 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface View Options To open the options menu as shown in Figure 2 59 click View and select Options The options menu allows the user to customize the user interface to their preferences Options rr rm Display Notation r Page Title m Navigation Mode C SONET Active page By Function C SDH Application titlebar By Device Track module IV Group devices setting Server IV Restore connection to server at startup Recent connection list contains f servers r Configure Display for 800x600 1024 x 768 or larger Cancel Restore D
190. nded and OTS cards are always placed on anti static surfaces If proper precautions are not taken damage will occur B For those locations in which cards are being installed remove the blanking panels and air diverters C Verify the required configuration of cards before proceeding Carefully install each card into a slot in the chassis Make sure that the card is lined up and fits cleanly with the connectors into the backplane of the chassis CAUTION Beware of bending the pins of the connectors when installing and removing cards from the chassis Backplane connectors with bent pins will cause damage to both the card and the chassis To install the card slowly slide the card into the desired slot Make sure the card is lined up with the connectors and push down on the top release and up on the bottom release until the card snaps into place OTS9100 User Manual 1 7 Getting Started When the card is in place tighten the two screws to secure it A CAUTION Do not torque the screws with more than 2 in lbs of force or damage will occur 5 Verify that the power switch of the OTS chassis is in the OFF position 6 Plug the unit into the appropriate AC Power source as follows Table 1 4 Power Requirements AC Voltage Voltage Range Frequency Range 110 VAC 90 VAC 132 VAC 48 62 Hz 220 VAC 180 VAC 250 VAC 48 62 Hz Removing Cards To remove the OTS cards perform the following steps 1 Turn
191. ng anomalies The Anomaly Insertion Setup shown to the left of the example Figure 2 22 provide menus for anomaly insertion setup The Current Anomaly Insertion and Insertion Control shown to the right supply information on the current insertion state and provide the insertion controls To select the type of anomaly injected use the pull down menu labeled Type under Anomaly Insertion Setup The anomaly types available are B1 BIP B2 BIP B3 BIP MS REI REI L Payload Bit Random Bit REI P and Random Bit SPE only To choose an anomaly rate click on the arrows or highlight and type in the boxes labeled Rate Or click on the Max Rate button to inject the maximum rate NOTE For these changes to take place the Apply Anomaly Setup Changes button must be clicked The Current Anomaly Insertion settings will then reflect the new changes The ability to insert single B2 anomalies in either the first B2 only or the first B2 in each STM n OC n structure can also be selected by clicking the appropriate radio button To start the anomaly injection click one of the buttons under Insertion Control e Insert Single Clicking on this button will inject a single anomaly of the type reflected under Current Anomaly Insertion e Start Continuous Insertion Clicking on this button will inject a continuous insertion of the anomaly type reflected under Current Anomaly Insertion at the indicated rate Anomaly Insertion and Through Mode Wh
192. nt cards e Optics e Transmit e Receive e Clock Trigger The following sections describe each of these cards in more detail NOTE There are several versions of the optical card available Each OTS91Lx series card has been designed with targeted analysis capabilities directed at specific analysis needs For additional information on each OTS91Lx series card see Appendix A OTS9100 User Manual OTS91L4 OTS91R2 OTS91T3 OTS91C3 MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE ok oK o ok Q OPTICAL OUT Los DPTICAL OU erect s 0C192 STM64 0c192 QC192 1310nm STM64 STM Rx Tx RECEIVE TRANSMIT 155 MHz EXT CLOCK IN OC19 STM CLK TRIG Figure 2 1 OTS9100 Front Panel 2 1 Operating Basics Functional Overview 10Gb s Transceiver Optics The 10Gb s Transceiver is available with two laser options 1310 nm and 1550 nm The 1310 nm Optical Transceiver consists of a 1310 nm Transmitter combined with a broad band Receiver The 1550 nm Optical Transceiver consists of a 1550 nm Transmitter combined with a broad band Receiver Figure 2 2 shows the Transceive card with 1310 nm laser front panel The front panel of the Transceiver card has optical inputs and outputs a laser lockout feature and LED monitoring lights Each of these items is described in more detail below Module OK A The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running On power up the LED first lights red then will
193. nting a window Double click on the button containing the bars and the window will detach from its location To reattach the window drag it back to that location OTS9100 User Manual 2 17 Operating Basics User Interface LED Window 2 18 Activating the LED Status window provides the user with a virtual LED status panel for the OTS9100 receiver s as shown in Figure 2 7 The virtual indicators found on this window provide error conditions both current and historical for all traditional receiver error LEDs The LED Status window may be activated through the View menu or from the toggle key on the toolbar Each condition has two separate indicators the one on the right is the Current condition and the indicator on the left is the History The Current indicators will turn red and the History indicators will turn yellow if an error condition currently exists Once the condition has been removed the red Current indicator will turn off The yellow History indicator will remain on until a new test has been started or until the Clear History button is clicked See Table 2 1 for a description of each indicator z Clear History el Slot 2 OTS91R2 1 z Slot 2 OTSS1R2 1 Signal AGGREGATE SIGNAL Note Extended Panel information can be viewed with scrolling LED bars this feature is only enabled when a panel is extended beyond the framework xrIAYv mz7 rm Zo AOomMn Thr
194. ntrol Bar The Test Control bar provides the controls to start stop pause and continue the test If multiple cards are present the test control bar also allows the user to choose the specific card under test by use of the pull down menu The Test Control bar may be activated via the View menu or from the At toggle button on the toolbar NOTE Changing parameters while a test is in progress may cause invalid errors Main Status Bar Client Jitter Status Error Status Test Status Laser Status Lockout Indicator i Indicator Indicator Indicator Indiratar ggockour Jeu MSCS Test Laser OFF CAFU Inactive Off The main status bar provides a summary status all active modules these could include laser test error insertion optical and jitter transmit states of all modules Whether a status button displays on the status bar or not is dependent upon the configuration of the loaded OTS cards Each button has to states an On or Active state and an OFF or Inactive state Client Lockout Jitter Error 2 16 The user interface has the ability to lockout other users from setting parameters To set the lockout control double click the box to the left of the main status bar if this feature is in an inactive state the box will be an empty gray square The Lockout Control dialog box will be displayed Click the desired button and then click OK to return to the main screen When the lockout is in effect a lock symbol will appear in the
195. of the Clock Trigger card The Receive card is now connected to the Clock Trigger card 4 Attach a 4 coax cable to the 10GHz Clock In port of the Transmit card to the 10GHz Clock Out port of the Clock Trig card The Transmit card is now connected to the Clock Trig card NOTE To install peripherals mouse monitor keyboard refer to the chassis manual the cable If one end of a cable is moved and the other end is not loosened damage to the A CAUTION Before moving previously installed cables loosen the connections on both ends of cable will occur OTS9100 User Manual 1 11 Getting Started OTS91L4 OTS91R2 oTs91T3 OTS91C3 MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE ok oK oK ok OPTICAL OUT Los IPTICAL OU erect anomay ocg OC19 0C19 Signum ste STM Fut Rx TX RECEIVE TRANSMIT CLK TRIG Figure 1 3 Proper location Interconnection cables Power On and Software Initialization l 5 Set the Power Switch on the back of the chassis to the ON position Turn on the display monitor Wait for Windows to boot and present the login prompt The first time the system is turned on a Microsoft Licensing Wizard will run follow the prompts and enter the Windows 2000 License Key number operator name password and network identifier The License Key number is located on a label affixed to the OTS chassis This utility will run only for this initial one time system launch To logon p
196. of the specified Near End Path parameter from G 826 analysis of received data Ratios are returned as NR3 values other parameters as NR1 values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis G826A PATH NEAR lt Enum gt Parameters Description ETIME Elapsed time EB C Errored blocks EB_R Errored block ratio BBE_C Background block errors BBE_R Background block error ratio EFS C Error free seconds EFS R Error free seconds ratio ES _C Errored seconds ES_R Errored second ratio SES C Severely errored seconds SES _R Severely errored second ratio CSES_C Consecutive SES periods UAS_C Unavailable seconds UAS_R Unavailable seconds error ratio SENSe ANALysis G826A PATH NEAR ALL 3 18 This query returns the values of all of the Near End Path parameters from G 826 analysis of received data The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under the heading SENSe ANALysis G826A PATH NEAR Ratios are returned as NR3 values other parameters as NR1 values Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis G826A PATH NEAR ALL OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis G826A RS This query returns the value of the specified Regenerator Section parameter from G 826 analysis of received data Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis G826A RS lt Enum gt Parameter Description ETIME Elapsed time EB _C Errored blocks EB_R Errored block ratio BBE_C Background block errors BBE_R Background b
197. ompted to begin making the emergency disk Windows NT Help Iof x Heip Topics Opions Using the Repair Disk utility to make an emergency repair disk The Repair Disk utility saves all of your current system settings to an Emergency Repair Disk ERD You can then use this disk to restore your computer if files become damaged It is strongly recommended that you create and update an ERD every time you make significant changes to your hardware or software setup To start Repair Disk gt Click here Ml For information about how to use Repair Disk click the Help menu in Repair Disk OTS9100 User Manual C 1 Emergency Startup Disk 4 The Repair Disk Utility box is now displayed In this box you may update the repair information create the repair disk exit or request additional help Click Create Repair Disk r amp Repair Disk Utility lel Ea This utility updates the repair information saved when you installed the system and creates an Emergency Repair disk The repair information is used to recover a bootable system in case of failure This utility should not be used as a backup tool Create Repair Disk Exit Help 5 The computer then prompts you to label the floppy disk and insert it into your floppy disk drive Click on OK to continue Repair Disk Utility x N Label a floppy disk Emergency Repair Disk and insert it into drive A Select OK when the disk is in the drive Warning All da
198. on B IEC 1000 4 5 Fast Surge Immunity Performance Criterion B IEC 1000 4 6 Conducted Immunity Performance Criterion A IEC 1000 4 11 Voltage Interruptions Performance Criterion B Specified by EN 61326 Conditions Requires the following option OTS9000 Option E1 Equipment must be installed within a proximity of no less than 70m to any radio service to minimize possible interference If interference is unavoidable further actions may be required Contact Tektronix for consultation OTS9100 Series 10Gb s SONET SDH Test Module using the OTS9010 or OTS9040 Optical Test System meets the intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility for all modules with serial number B000300 or higher A 16 OTS9100 User Manual Appendix B Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions Tektronix Tektronix OTS91L4 OTS91L4 10 Gb s TRANSCEIVER OPTICS CARD L4 15 L4 13 OPTICAL OUT OPTICAL OUT The 10Gb s Optical Transceiver card performs both E O and O E O O conversions for the OTS system It is available with two laser options 1310nm or 1550nm The 1310nm Optical Transceiver consists of a 1310nm laser combined with a broadband Receiver The 1550nm roses O roses Optical Transceiver consists of a 1550nm laser combined with a broadband Receiver The Optics transceiver card works in conjunction with the Transmit card which contains all of the transmit functionality for the OTS system The Optics transceiver card also
199. on between cable and front panel will not be complete and so will cause errors in transmission and receiver functions 2 Always be sure to clean both cable connectors and front panel connectors before installing optical cables A dirty optical connection can cause errors in transmission and receiver functions B 2 OTS9100 User Manual Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions Optical IN The Optical IN port accepts the incoming optical signal to the receiver This input signal must have a wavelength between 1290 nm and 1565 nm and must not exceed 0dBm of power The LED labeled SIG PRES above the OPTICAL IN heading will turn green when the Optics card detects an incoming signal Flashing Red indicates an optical loss of signal LOS condition and flashing amber indicates an optical overload condition WARNING The incoming signal must be attenuated to within specified power levels If the signal exceeds 0 dBm damage may occur Rx DATA OUT Rx DATA OUT provides signal interconnection between the system cards This output must be connected to the Rx DATA IN port found on the Receive card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable and DC block provided Rx DATA OUT Rx DATA OUT is a 10Gb s DATA Signal provided for jitter measurement This output must be connected to the 10 Gb s DATA IN port found on the OTS92H1 Clock Receiver Card using the coax cable provided no DC block is necessary Otherwise this output is nor
200. on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product S A en Electrostatically Protective Ground ATTENTION hazardous Earth Terminal Refer to Manual CLASS 3B LASER CAUTION Laser Radiation OTS9100 User Manual vii General Safety Summary viii OTS9100 User Manual Preface This manual describes how to use the Tektronix OTS9100 module This manual is your primary source of information about how the OTS9100 module functions The user interface also provides Windows Help files for further information on specific topics How This Manual is Organized This manual is divided into four sections Getting Started Operating Basics Reference and Appendices e Getting Started provides an overview of the OTS9100 module and describes first time operation e Operating Basics explains the basic principles of operating the OTS9100 The Operating Basics section also includes sample applications e Reference provides a brief overview of the syntax and format used for remote commands and provides explanations and listings of all the remote commands that may be used with the OTS9100 system e The Appendices provide a listing of specifications default factory settings an incoming inspection test list of acronyms and other useful information OTS9100 User Manual ix Preface Conventions
201. ones into the H1 H2 H3 bytes and the entire SPE RDI P HP RDJ has four different defect types The RDI P defect forces the G1 byte bits 4 1 to the following values gt one bit RDI P 100 gt Enhanced RDI P Payload 010 gt Enhanced RDI P Server 101 gt Enhanced RDI P Connectivity 110 For all Defects except LOS the time is selected in frames up to 240000 or continuous A 6 OTS9100 User Manual Specifications Receiver Analyzer Specifications Measurements B1 Errors The 9 95238 Gb s input is monitored for Section level Regenerator Section errors by comparing the received B1 byte to the recomputed BIP 8 parity The errors are detected and counted B2 Errors The 9 95238 Gb s input is monitored for Line Multiplex Section errors by comparing the 192 received B2 bytes to the recomputed BIP 8 x 192 BIP 24 x 64 parity The errors are detected and counted B3 Errors The 9 95238 Gb s input is monitored for Path level errors of the active channel by comparing the received B3 byte to the recomputed BIP 8 parity The errors are detected and counted REI L MS REI The 9 95238 Gb s input is monitored for REI L MS REI in the M1 byte The errors are detected and counted REI P The 9 95238 Gb s input is monitored for REI P The errors are detected and counted Frame Alignment Sequence Errors FAS The last two A1 bytes and the first two A2 bytes A1 Al A2 A2 of the 9 95238 Gb s input are m
202. onitored for errors For SDH B1 B2 B3 MS REI per G 821 and G 826 unavailability per G 827 For SONET B1 B2 B3 REI L per GR 253 CORE Error counts for the following are available through the receiver Errored Blocks Errored Seconds Severely Errored Seconds Unavailable Ratio Unavailable Seconds Errored Seconds Ratio Severely Errored Seconds Ratio Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Periods Background Block Errors Background Block Error Ratio Total Count Available Errored Blocks Available Errored Seconds Available Background Block Errors Available Severely Errored Seconds and BER Alarms Detection LOS 9 95238 Gb s input is monitored for the all zeros condition When the 10 Gb s signal has been off for more than 2 microseconds the LOS condition is declared The LOS alarm will assert no later than 127 microseconds after receiving the low signal all zeros condition LOF SEF If 4 or more consecutive frames have FAS errors then SEF is declared and reframing is attempted If SEF persists for more than 3 milliseconds LOF is declared AIS L The K2 byte is monitored for occurrence of all ones in three least significant bits e SONET If it occurs in five consecutive frames AIS L is declared e SDH If it occurs in three consecutive frames MS AIS is declared RDI L The K2 byte is monitored for occurrence of the 110 code in three least significant bits e SONET If it occurs in five consecutive frames RDI L is declared e S
203. ons e Transmitter Tx Specifications e Receiver Rx Specifications e Certifications and Compliance Environmental Specifications Temperature Ranges Operating Temperature 0 to 35 Celsius Non Operating Temperature 20 to 60 Celsius Humidity Ranges Operating Humidity 0 to 30 Celsius with relative humidity lt 80 non condensing and up to 35 C with a relative humidity lt 60 non condensing Non Operating Humidity 0 to 30 Celsius with relative humidity lt 90 non condensing and up to 60 C with a relative humidity lt 25 non condensing Dimensions The dimensions of all module cards are 6u 233 35 mm x 160 mm 9 19 inches x 6 3 inches form factor with 4hp 20 32 mm 0 8 inches front panel Weight Clock Trig module card 0 75 Ib Transmit module card 1 0 Ib Receiver module card 1 0 lb Optics module card 1 75 Ibs OTS9100 User Manual A 1 Specifications Transmitter Specifications Clock Source Internally generated clock 9953 28 MHz 4 6ppm Thru mode clock Derived from clock recovered from received signal External Clock 155 52MHz 100ppm Signal Generation Internal Mode This mode requires no external test equipment to generate a valid 9 95238 Gb s output Data 9 95238 Gb s output with PN7 scrambled NRZ format in BERT mode unframed and unscrambled PRBS data Table A 1 SONET Default Overhead Section Al and A2 are set to hexadecimal F6H and 28H respectively
204. ormat 3 7 History Tab 1 26 2 17 28 30 43 45 50 51 53 Hot swappable 1 7 I IEEE 488 2 3 1 6 In service Jitter Monitoring 1 32 Installation 1 7 interconnection cables 1 11 Interconnection diagram for OTS Multi rate Jitter Testing 1 15 Interconnection diagram for OTS Receive only 1 17 ITU 1 2 4 28 J Jitter Analyzer 2 1 21 Jitter Analyzer Test Control 3 4 Jitter at a 10Gb s signal rate 1 11 15 Jitter generation 1 1 2 30 2 1 Jitter Generation 1 1 31 Jitter Generator 1 1 Jitter Hit Seconds 1 25 Jitter Hit Threshold 2 23 Jitter Hybrid 1 1 30 Jitter Hybrid Rx 2 2 Index 2 Jitter measurements 1 1 2 3 5 Jitter output 1 1 23 30 31 32 Jitter Output Receive Only Testing in Manufacturing 1 31 Jitter Output Testing 1 30 Jitter Receiver 1 1 23 Jitter Signal 2 22 23 Jitter Signal Parameters 1 11 22 Jitter Test Applications 1 30 Jitter testing 1 3 11 14 15 jitter tolerance 1 1 33 34 Jitter Transmitter Setup 1 22 L Laser Control Bar 2 15 Laser On 2 16 LED 2 2 5 7 10 15 17 18 19 20 Lock Status 2 2 5 7 10 Loop timing 1 4 LOS 2 18 30 48 50 51 53 Loss of Signal 2 18 30 Lower Trace 2 30 Low intrinsic noise 1 1 2 Lower Trace Parameters 1 26 M Main Status Bar 2 16 Male to female connector 1 6 Manufacturing Test 1 4 Maximum Peak 2 30 Measurement Results 1 24 Measurement Title bar 1 24 Module
205. ors are distributed across the entire 10Gb s signal includes overhead and payload Random SPE Errors Errors are distributed across the SPE only Path and payload B1 B2 or B3 single error or error rate is generated by inverting a random bit in the byte MS REI REI L The OC 192 M1 byte is overwritten to convey the error count OTS9100 User Manual A 5 Specifications Table A 3 Error Rate Max Min Error Type Maximum Rate Minimum Rate B1 6 430 x 10 1x10 B2 6 502 x 10 1x 10 B3 2 66 x 10 1x10 REI L MS REI 2 072 x 10 1x101 Payload Bit 3 906 x 10 1x101 Random Bit 3 906 x 10 1x10 REI P HP REI 2 66 x 10 1x101 Random Bit SPE only 3 906 x 10 1x10 Random VC Bit Defect Alarm Generation LOS 9 95238 Gb s output is forced to all zeros for a user selected time from 1 to 15 microseconds with a resolution of 1 microsecond or continuously LOF SEF All of the A1 and A2 bytes of the 9 95238 Gb s output are inverted for a user selected time AIS L MS AIS The Line OH Multiplex Section OH and the entire SPE are set to all ones for a user selected time RDI L MS RDI The 110 code is set in the three least significant bits of the K2 byte for a user selected time LOP HP LOP sets the H1 H2 pointer bytes to 63 0F for SONET and 6B 0F for SDH This equates to a pointer value of 783 which is over the maximum allowable pointer value of 782 AIS P HP AIS forces all
206. ot selected dialog box To overwrite an incoming byte click in the box beside the selection under the Overwrite Incoming heading If you wish to keep a byte from being overwritten A make sure the box beside the selection is not checked Structure in the Tx The bytes available to be overwritten are J1 Trace C2 Setup men um ust G1 F2 H4 Z3 Z4 and Z5 B3 parity regeneration is match the Signal always enabled if any of the byte or payload overwrite oe uctur 7 ee dtd selections are checked X In order tor intrinsic Path Through mode to NOTE The Tx Signal If Overwrite Payload is checked the payload data is operate correctly If the replaced with the Test Pattern selected on the Signal Signal Structure of the page Tx does not match the Signal Structure of the Rx the overwritten bytes will not be accurate This is also NOTE There is no explicit byte edit for G1 Checking true for B3 the G1 overwrite setting provides the ability to insert regeneration REI P OTS9100 User Manual 2 35 Operating Basics User Interface J1 Multi Byte Trace J1 Trace provides a capability to uniquely identify each of the multiple channels being carried in a Dense Wave Division Multiplexer DWDM system providing an end to end continuity check It is possible to extract for display the J1 trace to confirm channel ID The OTS9100 has the ability to generate unique J1 traces This allows test signals to be easily identified or
207. other values are returned in NR1 format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure PATH CUMUlative ALL SENSe MEASure PATH WINDow This query returns the value of the specified result parameter as measured during the most recent N seconds The duration N of the measurement window is set by the SENSe MEASure WINDow SIZE command Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure PATH WINDow lt Enum gt Parameters Description B3_C B3 errors B3_ES B3 errored seconds B3_ER B3 error ratio REI_C Path REI errors REI_ES Path REI errored seconds REI_ER Path REI error ratio AIS_ES Path AIS errored seconds RDI_ES Path RDI errored seconds PLM_ES Path Label Mismatch errored seconds UNEQ_ES Path Label Unequipped errored seconds LSS_ES Loss of Synch errored seconds LOP_ES Loss of Pointer errored seconds J1TIM_ES Path trace mismatch errored seconds PAYL_C Payload errors PAYL_ES Payload errored seconds PAYL_ER Payload error ratio RDIPAY_ES Path RDI Payload errored seconds RDICON_ES Path RDI Connectivity errored seconds RDISRV_ES Path RDI Server errored seconds SENSe MEASure PATH WINDow ALL This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SENSe MEASure PATH WINDow query as measured during the most recent N second period The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSe MEASure PATH WINDow Ratios are returned in NR3 format other values are returned in NR1 format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt
208. ough D3 Section DCC bytes bit value 8 DCC_L D4 through D12 Line DCC bytes bit value 32 E1A E1 byte bit value 2 E2A E2 byte bit value 512 FIA F1 byte bit value 4 JOA JO Section trace byte bit value 1 M1A M1 byte bit value 128 S1A S1 byte bit value 64 Z2A Z2 byte bit value 256 OTS9100 User Manual 3 49 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA OVERhead PASSthru ALL This command controls the source of transmitted overhead data in Through Mode The parameter is a numeric value in which each bit enables retransmission of received data for one specific overhead field The bit values are shown under SOURCE DATA OVERHEAD PASSTHROUGH The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA OVERhead PASSthru ALL SOURce lt slot gt DATA OVERhead PASSthru ALL lt NR1 gt SOURce DATA PARIty LOOP This command enables the local calculation of B1 and B2 parity bits when the transmitter is in Through Mode When this function is enabled the B1 and B2 bits are calculated from the payload value when it is disabled the B1 and B2 bits have the values of the received B1 and B2 bits This setting has no effect when the payload is internally generated The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PARIty LOOP SOURce lt slot gt DATA PARIty _LOOP lt Boolean gt Parameters Description THRU B1 and B2 bit values are taken from the received sign
209. ount of invalid HDLC frames MINSize Count of HDLC frames received with minimum size violation SENSe MEASure HDLC FRAMes ALL This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SENSe MEASure HDLC FRAMes query The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under lt SENSe MEASure HDLC FRAMes values are returned in NR1 format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure HDLC FRAMes ALL OTS9100 User Manual 3 35 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe MEASure HDLC BYTes This query returns the number of HDLC bytes received with good FCS Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure HDLC BYTes SENSe MEASure IP PACKets This query returns the value of the specified result parameter in NR1 format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure IP PACKets lt Parameter gt Parameters Description TOTal Total count of IP bytes received GOOD Count IP bytes received with good checksum BAD Count of IP bytes received with bad checksum FREE Count of IP Packet received with no payload errors PAYLoad Count of IP Packet received with payload errors SENSe MEASure IP PACKets ALL This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SENSe MEASure IP PACKets query The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under SENSe MEASure IP PACKets values are returned in NR1 format Syntax SENSe lt slot gt MEASure IP PACKets ALL SENSe MEASure LINE CUMUlative This query returns t
210. over network links These may not be able to send eight bit data or ASCII control characters For this reason the OTS9100 remote command system implements an alternative block format called hex block format in which each byte of binary data is sent as two hex digits using the characters 0 to 9 and A to F Blocks in hex format thus consist of twice many characters as the corresponding blocks in binary format The block in the example above would be in hex format 2326162636465464748494A6B6C6D6E6F 70 where 232 is the prefix for a 32 character block 61 is the hexadecimal representation of a the first character in the block 62 is the hexadecimal representation of b and so on Note that the block s count of data bytes is doubled representing twice as much data as in the binary format block The OTS9100 system must be explicitly set to transmit or receive blocks in binary or hex block format See the description of the command OTS9100 User Manual 3 7 Reference Remote Commands Syntax SCPI Commands and Queries SCPI is a standard that provides guidelines for remote programming of instruments These guidelines provide a consistent programming environment for instrument control and data usage This environment uses defined programming messages instrument responses and data format across all SCPI instruments regardless of manufacturer The OTS9100 modules uses a command language derived from this S
211. ower is present OTS9100 User Manual General Safety Summary vi Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do not operate in Wet Damp Conditions To avoid electric shock do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere Wear Eye Protection To avoid eye injury wear eye protections if there is a possibility of exposure to high intensity rays Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation OTS9100 User Manual Safety Summary Safety Terms and Symbols Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual Icon Label Meaning Warning statements identify conditions or practices that J WARNING could result in injury or loss of life Caution statements identify conditions or practices that AN CAUTION could result in damage to this product or other property Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols
212. p facility allows files to be moved or removed based on their absolute age the total number of files present or the total size of the files either in absolute megabytes or as a percentage of the total capacity of the disk The age of a file is determined based on the Delete files by oldest setting The number of files present counts sets of results data a summary file and its associated history file count as one results file set When enough files have been added to the list to meet all enabled limits the indicated files are either deleted or moved to the indicated directory If processing of a given file fails possibly due to file permissions or the destination directory being unavailable processing of files will proceed through the remainder of the list For a move to complete successfully the target directory must exist and be accessible to the OTS system Ifa move fails the system will simply retry the operation next time the cleanup process runs The final control in the dialog allows the user to control how frequently the cleanup process runs It is guaranteed that cleanup passes will occur no more frequently than specified here It is possible for the system to defer cleanup for a longer interval as necessary 2 88 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface ResultsViewer The OTS Results Viewer is a stand alone Windows program that reads the Test Results files from the OTS Test System It provides the
213. point in time that it was cleared OTS9100 User Manual 2 19 Operating Basics User Interface Module LED Panel The module LED panel operates like the LED Window This panel is accessed via the View menu It may also be toggled from the tool bar To make the panel always remain on top of the Windows screen check the box marked Always on top There are two differences between the LED Window and the module LED panel The module LED panel does not provide the LED display options all LEDs are always displayed In addition in the module LED panel mode all receiver LED panels are shown In the example in Figure 2 8 there are four receiver cards loaded an OTS91R2 OTS93R1 OTS92R1 OTSIIR1 and one synchronization card the OTS92S1 Observe that the LEDs shown are different for each card NOTE For each card the user interface only displays the options available for that card If the options are not displayed then the option is not available for that particular card This view does not display the Module Summary or the User Definable panels Clear History IV Always on top Slot 2 Slot 6 Slot 10 Slot 13 Slot 16 OTS91R2 1 OTS93R1 1 OTS92R1 1 OTS91R1 1 OTS92 1 1 Signal Signal Bom Signal 155MHz2 PLL Qos Qos Lock Status Qos Lock Status QLoF OLOF vitter Hit OLOF Q Ert Signal Q SEF Q SEF Q SEF BITS SETS Signal QO Lock Status Q Bit Error Figure 2 7 The L
214. ponding query returns one of these values corresponding to the instrument s current setting A binary value that typically indicates whether a function is on or off enabled or disabled Querying a Boolean parameter always returns 0 or 1 never OFF or ON Boolean values may be specified as follows 0 or OFF off disabled 1 or ON on enabled A string of characters delimited by either apostrophes or quote marks Strings must in general be composed of ASCII printing characters and may not contain the apostrophe or quote mark used as the delimiter OTS9100 User Manual 3 9 Reference Remote Commands Syntax lt Block gt An array of arbitrary binary data bytes including characters not in the ASCII printing character set A block is transmitted as a block header followed by data bytes as in the following example 216ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP in which gt The character indicates that what follows is a block of data gt The first digit 2 in this example is the number of digits in the block length field gt The next digits of which there are two in this example indicate the number of bytes of data that follow In this example there are 16 bytes so the block length field is 16 There are two digits in 16 so the character 2 following the is the digit count gt The bytes that follow ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP are the actual data The number of bytes of data must match the number indicated by the block header O
215. ptional and alternative parameters 3 10 Some parameters are optional these appear in brackets SENSE STATUS LEDS lt NR1 gt The command description includes the meaning of the parameter and the effect of leaving it out Some parameters may accept data of more than one type the alternatives are shown separated by a vertical bar For example SYSTEM COMMUNICATE GPIB PRIMARY lt Enum gt lt NR1 gt means that the command can accept either a keyword from the given enum list or an integer numeric value OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Syntax Abbreviating Commands Queries and Parameters You can abbreviate most SCPI commands queries and parameters to an accepted short form This manual shows these short forms as a combination of upper and lower case letters The upper case letters tell you what the accepted short form should consist of as shown in Figure 3 2 you can create a short form by using only the upper case letters The accepted short form and long form are equivalent and request the same action of the instrument Long form ofa SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM1A PROMpt command Minimum information needed for accepted short form Y Accepted short form SYST COMM SERI COM1A PROM of a command and parameter Figure 3 2 Example of abbreviating a command NOTE The numeric part of a command or query must always be included in the accepted short form In Figure 3 2 the 1 of COM1A
216. r Fixed Data changes to match the newly entered value SPE VC3 Stuff Column Control The stuff column control allows column 30 and column 59 of the SPE VC3 to be stuffed with either all zeros or with the payload pattern This option is only available if the pattern is STS 1 or VC3 Trigger Output The Trigger Output allows the user to select what condition activates the output trigger Check the appropriate box for Anomaly Defect or Payload trigger or activate all three Triggering on defects provides an active HIGH for each frame in which a defect is inserted Triggering on anomalies provides an active HIGH for each frame in which an anomaly is inserted Triggering on anomalies provides an active HIGH for every occurring TSE error Receiver Threshold Offset The Receiver Threshold Offset provides a means to change the decision point of the signal eye The decision point is the point at which the signal is declared a one or a zero The receiver threshold offset allows the user to shift this decision point changing the offset This ability is useful during Q factor analysis and accelerated BER testing To edit click the Edit Rx Threshold Offset button which then displays the Receiver threshold offset dialog box as shown in Figure 2 27 Receiver Threshold Offset Current Value Available Range Omv 200 mv to 200 mv it Cancel Figure 2 27 Receiver Threshold Offset dialog box The current value of the receiver threshold off
217. r return the floating Navigation window click and drag it back to the original location where it will be repositioned in its original frame S I OTS93T1 1 manne Every device has an associated summary represented by a summary icon within the Navigation Window Double click on each summary icon for each device activated to view the Test Control 2 24 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Setup Property Menus When SETUP is selected from the Navigation window by clicking on the SETUP Title bar icons for all loaded Transmitter and Receiver cards in addition to a summary menu are displayed The Setup Property menus provide separate configuration control over each transmitter or receiver function Each Receiver and Transmitter card has a setup menu that pertains to it If an Receiver Rx icon is clicked the Receiver setup menu is displayed for the Rx card it relates to If a Tx icon is clicked the Transmitter setup menu is displayed for the selected transmitter icon The transmit and receive setup menus may contain multiple menu screens each selected by a tab Each tab represents a category of functionality specific to the transmitter or receiver setup Every card has a setup menu that pertains to it 3 Note the Active Card Title Bar J Setup OTS91T3 10 Gb s Tx 1 nal Transport Overhead Path Overhead Error Insertion K1 K2 Decode IP Payload IP Erro 1 Click on Setup oo
218. rements and Compliance OTS9100 User Manual 2 13 Operating Basics User Interface Help 2 14 Window The Window menu provides the ability to setup how the menus are displayed within the OTS workspace It is possible to set the display to a single window or multiple menu windows through this menu Display functions include Single Mode displaying one window at a time and Multiple Mode displaying many windows simultaneously Single Mode Single Mode displays one active window full size with no visible representation for other properties Exit the Single Mode display by deselecting the check box for Single Mode from the Menu bar Deselecting Single Mode enables other Window options Multiple Mode To get a multiple window display more than one window at a time select Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically To enable this feature Multiple functions must be active Setup displays the active device setup menu Setup OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 Fy Setup OTS91T3 10 Gb s Tx 1 Signal Rate Filter Bandwidth 2o kHz 80 MHz Wideband Signal Type Daa s S Jitter Hit Threshold 2 000 Ulpp Edit Front Panel Output Settings Demodulated Output Range fi Ulpp Recovered Clack e22 MHz Figure 2 6 Multiple Window Mode View The Help menu provides a means of accessing more information on the product on the system and on the company The menu consists of Help Topics OTS Product Family Help
219. ress CNTL ALT DEL The logon information dialog box is now displayed Verify that the user name is Administrator and there is no password then click OK To launch the system application click the OTS9000 icon on the desktop NOTE The OTS9000 application may also be reached through the START menu Click START select Tektronix then select OTS9000 OTS9100 User Manual Getting Started Module Quick Check NOTE Before installing the optical cables clean the optical fiber connectors on both the cable ends and the front panel connectors 1 With proper in line 15dB attenuator connect a single mode optical cable between the Optical OUT and Optical IN connectors on the Optics card CAUTION Signal levels greater than 0 dBm may damage the Optical Input devices Always pad the input level to less than 0 dBm Always use 15dBm of attenuation when connecting the OTS9100 module transmit output to its receive input Failure to do so will damage the optical detector 2 Ifthe instrument is not already powered on start the system as described in the Power On and Software Initialization procedure of the previous section 3 From the Menu Bar click the System button this opens a drop down menu In the drop down menu select Signal Standard then select Set to SONET 4 Transmitter Setup From the Menu Bar click on View and select System View The System View should display an image with each card in position Check th
220. riptions Tx Data IN Tx Data Input allows electrical data signals to be applied to the optical transmitter This input must be connected to the Tx Data Out port found on the OTS91Tn Transmitter card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable provided Laser Lockout Remote Interlock REMOTE INTERLOCK is a bantam plug normally closed connection internally wired in series with the laser lockout key switch It can be used with additional hardware to disable the laser output NOTE If this connection is used the ferrite bead provided with the module must be attached to the remote interlock cable for lower emissions and CE mark conformance Install the bead close to the end of the cable connected to the Optics card Laser LOCKOUT is a safety device The key switch disables the laser output when it is turned to the open lock position The laser output can only be turned on when the key is in the closed lock position NOTE The laser output cannot be enabled unless 1 The Laser Lockout key switch is set to the open lock or on position 2 The Remote Interlock is either not used or externally enabled 3 The Laser output is software enabled NOTE Optical cables use and care 1 When using the optical cables ensure that the cable is firmly seated in the front panel connector The optical connectors on the front panel are keyed If the cable is not inserted into the connector key properly the connecti
221. rison value for Path Label Mismatch analysis The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH LABEI EXPEcted SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH LABEI EXPEcted lt NR1 gt SENSe ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted This command sets the data sequence length and data byte values against which the receiver compares the received signal for path Trace Identifier Mismatch measurements The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE 488 data block The query form returns the current settings of these parameters Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted lt Enum gt lt Block gt Parameters Description L1B Constant 8 bit data L16B A repeating sequence of 16 bytes 0 filled with CRC LI6FREE A repeating sequence of 16 bytes arbitrary format L64B A repeating sequence of 64 bytes space filled with CR LF L64FREE A repeating sequence of 64 bytes arbitrary format 3 24 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted TY PE This command sets the data sequence length used by the receiver for path Trace Identifier Mismatch measurements This parameter may also be set by the SENSe ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted command The query form returns the current setting of this parameter Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted T YPE SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis PATH TRACe EXPEcted TY
222. rk connection that receives the command they are not valid for the GPIB This command controls for the current remote control port how the system echoes the characters it receives The parameter is a numeric value containing three individual control bits The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate PORT ECHO SYSTem COMMunicate PORT ECHO lt NR1 gt Bit value Function 0 Disables echo 1 Enables echo 2 Causes the input terminator character to be echoed as CR LF 4 Enables input line buffering received characters are not processed until the terminating CR or LF SYSTem COMMunicate PORT PROMpt This command enables or disables the user prompt on the current remote control port When the prompt is enabled the system prompts when it is ready for a command The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate PORT PROMpt SYSTem COMMunicate PORT PROMpt lt Boolean gt OTS9100 User Manual 3 67 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate PORT RXTERM This command selects for the current remote control port the character the OTS system recognizes as End of Input The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate PORT RXTERM SYSTem COMMunicate PORT RXTERM lt Enum gt Parameters Description LF Line feed LF character Ox0A an optional preceding CR is ignored CR Carriage return CR character 0x0D an optional preceding LF
223. rrent setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis SECTion TRACe TIM SENSe lt slot gt ANALysis SECTion TRACe TIM lt Boolean gt SENSe DATA AUTOscan STRUcture This query returns the signal structure found in the received signal Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA AUTOscan STRUcture Parameters Description 192 Bulk data at 10Gb s 48 Bulk data at 2 5Gb s 12 Bulk data at 622Mb s 3 Bulk data at 155Mb s 1 Bulk data at 51Mb s 0 Mixed signal structure OTS9100 User Manual 3 27 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe DATA CHANnel This command selects the active channel for the received signal The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA CHANnel lt SENSe lt slot gt DATA CHANnel lt NR1 gt SENSe DATA IP PA YLoad PATTern This command selects the test pattern inserted as IP payload into the received signal The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA IP PAYLoad PAT Tern SENSe lt slot gt DATA IP PAYLoad PAT Tern lt Parameter gt Parameters Description PRBS31A ITU standard PRBS 2431 1 pattern PRBS311 Inverted PRBS 2431 1 pattern USER Constant 16 bit user specified data SENSe DATA IP PA YLoad PATTern UDATA This command specifies the data value inserted into the received signal when constant data is selected for the IP test pattern The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA IP PAYLoad PAT Tern UDAT
224. rrored Seconds are counted per ITU T G 826 and GR 253 CORE specifications Severely errored seconds are only counted during available time UAS Unavailable Seconds are the number of seconds during which error performance was such that the received signal was deemed to be unavailable Transition into and out of the unavailable state is evaluated according to ITU T G 826 and GR 253 CORE standards CSES Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds are the count of consecutive severely errored second periods A CSES period is defined as a period of more than 2 but less than 10 consecutive SES OTS9100 User Manual 2 77 Operating Basics User Interface APS Measurements Menu When APS Category bar is selected from the Navigation window and an icon chosen the APS Measurements property menu is displayed as shown in Figure 2 52 This menu controls setup implementation and results viewing of the APS Duration Counter test System View Device Window Help le k u Aa a a on or Al Lasers IR gt m m All Tests APS Meas OTS91R2 10 Gb s Rx 1 oE z Clear History Test Parameters ne lot 24 X Condition Tested SEF Slot 2 Analysis e Test Time Limit 100 moer OTSS1R2 1 APS Meas Switch Time Threshold 50 msec oO EditTest Parameters OTSS1R2 10 Gb s Rie 1 7 Start APS Test Copy Results to Clipboard ot r Test Results OTS93R1 2 5 Gb Geer TestResult
225. ructure No embedded spaces are allowed between or within nodes correct SOURce DATA STRUcture incorrect SOURce DATA STRUcture incorrect SO URce DATA STRU cture Slot Specifiers The OTS9100 system can contain multiple modules of the same type e g more than one receiver more than one transmitter Any module specific command or query may include as a numeric suffix on the header s first keyword the slot number of the target module to indicate the particular instance of that module for which the command or query is intended For example the command SOURCES INSERT ANOMALY MODE CONTINUOUS is intended for the transmitter module in slot 5 Slot specifiers are indicated by lt Slot gt in the command listings Slot specifiers are optional if a slot specifier is omitted the command or query is directed to the lowest numbered slot that contains a module for which the command or query is valid OTS9100 User Manual 3 13 Reference Remote Commands Command Description Command Description This section provides detailed descriptions of the format and parameters of each OTS9100 command These commands are listed in alphabetical order NOTE Not all commands and command parameters are available for all modules Commands with option limitations are so noted CLS This command clears the IEEE 488 2 error status register and event queue Syntax CLS ESE This command sets the value of the IEEE 488 2 Event Status
226. ry Data Path The upper window shows a trace for each measurement parameter A dark rectangle is shown for a measurement interval during which an errored second occurred LOS LOF LOP SEF OOF TIM AIS RDI PLM UNEQ LSS or one or more errors were counted B1 B2 B3 FAS REI BIT TSE The lower window shows a bar graph display B1 B2 FAS REI of the anomaly selected by the Detail View selector The display may be linear or logarithmic and is automatically scaled based on the maximum value for that parameter The Zoom Out In slider sets the display s time axis The limits are 1 second tick to 1 hour tick The display and the detail view scale are set accordingly The Scroll bar scrolls the display horizontally The display Time Axis may be set to show elapsed test time or time of day Elapsed test time does not accrue when a test is paused time of day continues The Cursor shown as a colored line on the display identifies a particular measurement sample It may be positioned in several ways Incrementally by moving it with the four Cursor buttons 7 Directly by clicking the mouse in one of the data windows Directly by entering a time value in the Cursor field and clicking the Set button When the Time Axis display is set to Elapsed Time the cursor position may be entered In seconds e g 135 In hours minutes seconds e g 2 15 or 0 2 15 In days hours
227. s SONET TIM arretener i snieni eneen AEAT ages EAA EEA EEA EEA EERENS 2 74 Analysis SDHIG 826 enr ioiii iniii a iia i iied a seagate aR A 2 76 APS Measurements MenU ssssssessssenssessrerrrrnstesrttrnrnnsteerttnnnnnsstenntnnnnnesrennn enn 2 78 Remote Access Setups 0 cceccecccccceceeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeesegeaeaeaeceeeeeseseenaeceeeeeeeeensnnaeees 2 81 Select SERV Clim ese teed ea At ei ae eto Eee ine aretha aie Aol 2 82 View OptiONS iios ii edea ade die daak raa aada uai dtaa etae deii raada l badge aada Sa 2 83 System VIEW unirse dedni eri i ei ee aeaa adia 2 85 SGPO aa e a E A R R E E A dteead 2 86 Results Files 2 c22 fetuses tect nae ead etek Pet a a e E a e ea 2 87 Results File Management ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeceeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 2 87 Results ViGWOR saditi ate cakes dort heer laced ete ede eee ett 2 89 OTS System Event Printer Application 0 cccccccecccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeteees 2 99 Reference Commands OVGRVIOW miisroro a aE ene anii SNE Na apaa Eanan tenia 3 1 IEEE 488 2 System Commands ccccceceeececeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeseeaeeeseenaees 3 1 Remote Control Setup and Format Command6s cccceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeteesenaeeeeees 3 1 Remote Control Port Settings ce ecccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeetnaeeeeeeaaes 3 2 Remote Control Lockout spiska A bceeeihaddaceated pideue eaaa thas aaa aA a a aasa aan
228. s arbitrary format L64B A repeating sequence of 64 bytes space filled with CR LF L64FREE A repeating sequence of 64 bytes arbitrary format OTS9100 User Manual 3 51 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA PATH TRACe VALUe This command sets the data byte values transmitted in the Path Trace J1 byte of the Path Overhead The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE 488 data block The query form returns the current values Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe VALUe SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe VALUe lt Block gt SOURce DATA PATH TRACe VALUe STRIng This command sets the data byte values transmitted in the Path Trace J1 byte of the Path Overhead The data byte values are specified as an ASCII string The query form returns the current values Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe VALUe STRIng SOURce lt slot gt DATA PATH TRACe VALUe STRIng lt String gt SOURce DATA PAYLoad BACKground PATTern This setting selects the background test pattern inserted as payload into the transmitted signal The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad BACKground PATTern SOURce lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad BACKground PAT Tern lt Enum gt Parameters Description PRBS15A ITU standard PRBS 2415 1 pattern PRBS15l Inverted PRBS 2415 1 pattern PRBS23A ITU standard PRBS 2423 1 pattern PRBS23l Inverted PRBS 2423 1 pattern PRBS31A ITU standard PRBS 2431 1 p
229. s set to the open lock or on position The Remote Interlock is either not used or externally enabled The Laser output is software enabled 1 NOTE Optical cables use and care When using the optical cables ensure that the cable is firmly seated in the front panel connector The optical connectors on the front panel are keyed If the cable is not inserted into the connector key properly the connection between cable and front panel will not be complete and so will cause errors in transmission and receiver functions 2 Always be sure to clean both cable connectors and front panel connectors before installing optical cables A dirty optical connection can cause errors in transmission and receiver functions OTS9100 User Manual B 5 Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions 10Gb s OPTICAL RECEIVE ONLY L6 Tektronix OTS91L6 The 10Gb s Optical Receive only card performs the O E conversion for the OTS system This Optics card works in conjunction with the mony E Receive card which contains all of the receiver functionality and analysis capability for the OTS system Figure B 3 shows the Receiver Optics card front panel Module OK The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running eee On power up the LED first lights red and then changes to green when Qe the system has finished initializing OPTICAL IN NOTE If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing O call Tektronix for service
230. s the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIJal COM2A DTR SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A DTR lt Boolean gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A ECHO This command controls for the COM2 serial port how the system echoes the characters it receives The parameter is a numeric value containing three individual control bits The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A ECHO SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A ECHO lt NR1 gt Bit value Function 0 Disables 0 echo 1 Enables 1 echo 2 Causes the input terminator character to be echoed as CR LF 4 Enables input line buffering received characters are not processed until the terminating CR or LF SYSTem COM Municate SERIal COM2A ENABle This command enables or disables the operation of serial port COM2 as a remote control port The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A ENABle lt SYSTem COMMunicate SERlal COM2A ENABle lt Boolean gt 3 72 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem COM Municate SERIal COM2A FLOW This command sets the type of flow control used for serial communications on the COM2 serial port When flow control is enabled the receiver signals the sender when its buffer is full so as not to lose characters The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal COM2A FLOW SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal CO
231. s up a dialog box shown in Figure 2 25 The dialog box displays the current K1 K2 settings and allows the option to edit the byte via hexadecimal or symbolic form a subset of 0x00 0xFF 2 40 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface For K1 type in the channel being set and click on the Request pull down menu to select the new Signal Transport Overhead Path Overhead Error Insertion K1 K2 Decode P Payload IP Error Insertion K1 K2 Bytes K1 00 0000 000 Request 0 No Request K2 00 0000 0000 Binary Request Channel 0 0000 000 Bridged Channel 0 0000 0000 Binary Architecture 0 1 1 Mode 0 Idle cant Figure 2 25 Edit K1 K2 Bytes dialog box value The values available from the pull down menu are 0 No Request 1 Do Not Revert 2 Reverse Request 3 Unused 4 Exercise 5 Unused 6 Wait to Restore 7 Unused 8 Manual Switch 9 Unused 10 Signal Degrade Low Priority 11 Signal Degrade High Priority 12 Signal Fail Low Priority 13 Signal Fail High Priority 14 Forced Switch 15 Lockout of Position For K2 type in the bridged channel being set then use the pull down menus to select the architecture and mode The values available from the architecture pull down menu are 0 1 1 1 1 N OTS9100 User Manual 2 41 Operating Basics User Interface 2 42 The values available from the mode pull down menu are 0 Idle
232. se from this chained STS 192c PRBS23A message might be Response from first query Response from second query Figure 3 3 Example of chaining commands and queries If a command or query has the same root and lower level nodes as the previous command or query you can omit these nodes In Figure 3 4 the second command has the same root and lower level nodes SOURCe INSErt ANOMaly as the first command so these nodes can be omitted SOURce INSErt ANOMaly TYPE REI SOURce INSErt ANOMaly RATE 1e 4 Identical root and lower level nodes SOURce INSErt ANOMaly TYPE REI RATE 1e 4 First command Second command omitted the root and lower level nodes Figure 3 4 Example of omitting root and lower level nodes in chained message 3 12 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Syntax General Rules Here are some general rules for using SCPI commands queries and parameters 66 99 You can use single or double quotation marks for quoted strings but you cannot use both types of quotation marks for the same string correct This string uses quotation marks correctly correct This string also uses quotation marks correctly incorrect This string does not use quotation marks correctly You can use upper case lower case or a mixture of both cases for all command queries and parameters SOURCE DATA STRUCTURE is the same as source data structure and SOURCE data St
233. set is displayed in the upper left hand corner under the Current Value heading The available range is shown in the right hand corner To change the threshold offset click and drag the slide bar then click Apply The Current Value should change to match the new value NOTE The new value will not take affect until Apply is clicked If the slide bar is changed but Apply is not clicked the Current Value will not change OTS9100 User Manual 2 49 Operating Basics User Interface Receiver Trace Mismatch The trace mismatch menu of the Receiver setup as shown in Figure 2 28 provides the setup information for the JO J1 Trace C2 Status and HP Detection Each of the selections available is described in more detail in the following sections zi Setup OTS91R2 10 Gbi s Rx 1 o a Signal Trace Mismatch IP Setup oo JO Section Trace Mismatch OTS91R2 mh ater lv Analyze JO Trace Mismatch Trace fTektronix BTT Length 16 Bytes Edit Expected JO Trace J1 Path Trace Mismatch m OTSITI 10 Gb s Tx 1 aJ pE HIE 10 Gb s Tx 1 v Analyze J1 Trace Mismatch m Oo Trace fekeeonix BTT Length 16 Bytes Edit Expected J1 Trace OTS92R1 Jitter Analyzer 1 OTS9251 Synchronization Module 1 Path Label Status C2 Received F1 no ASCII decode defined Expected 01 Equipped Nonspecific Payload Edit Ex a Signal Monitor Compliance Figure 2 28 Receiver Setup Trace Mismatch menu J0
234. shed loading remove the CDrom and place it in its case OTS9100 User Manual F 1 Installing the Software F 2 OTS9100 User Manual Appendix G Appendix Illustrations of cabled OTS9100 module This appendix provides examples of cabling the OTS9100 module The examples provide a reference for location and recommended cable lengths used to configure the OTS9100 module Cabling OTS9100 Module with OTS91L4 Optical Card Tektronix Tektronix Tektronix Tektronix OTS91L4 OTS91R2 OTS91T3 OTS91C3 MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE ok OOK ok ok ok OPTICAL OUT Los PTICAL OU O DEFECT 155 MHz EXT CLOCK IN i oebis anomaly SIG PRES OPTICAL IN 1pcBLock IN CONFIG Rx EVENT OUT Rx Tx EVENT OUT F SYNC OUT 4 or 6 coax cable 8 coax cable for OTS9200 interconnection 2 6 coax cable 10 GHz 10 GHz Li Rx CLOCK OUT CLOCK OUT LASER LOCKOUT u 4 coax cable REMOTE INTERLOCK 0C192 0C192 0C192 C g2 sT Mot STM64 SA STM64 Rx Tx RECEIVE TRANSMIT CLK TRIG l l l l SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3 SLOT 4 OTS9100 User Manual G 1 Appendix G Cabling OTS9100 Module to OTS9261 Tunable Laser OTS91L7 OTS91R2 OTS91T3 OTS91C3 MODULE MODULE MODULE OMe ok ok ok n OUT e LOS PTICAL OU O DEFECT 155 MHz EXT CLOCK IN 10Gb s Q pee anomaly S OPTICAL IN Rx EVENT Tx 1 DC BLOCK O ST EVENT ONT IN CONFIG i TO
235. slot gt DATA PAYLoad PATTern lt Enum gt Parameters Description PRBS15A ITU standard PRBS 2415 1 pattern PRBS15l Inverted PRBS 2415 1 pattern PRBS23A ITU standard PRBS 2423 1 pattern PRBS23l Inverted PRBS 2423 1 pattern PRBS31A ITU standard PRBS 2431 1 pattern PRBS311 Inverted PRBS 2431 1 pattern ZEROs Constant zero data ONEs Constant one data USER Constant 8 bit user specified LIVE Live data OTS9100 User Manual 3 29 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe DATA PAYLoad PATTern UDATA This command selects the fixed test pattern for the received signal The query form returns the current setting Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad PATTern UDATA lt SENSe lt slot gt DATA PAYLoad PAT Tern UDATA lt NR1 gt SENSe DATA POH ALL This query returns a block of data representing the Path Overhead data from an STS 1 in the received signal There are 9 bytes in the block returned For SONET these bytes are J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 Z3 Z4 Z5 for SDH these bytes are J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 F3 K3 N1 Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA POH ALL lt NR1 gt SENSe DATA POH BYTE This query returns a single byte of data from the Path Overhead data for the selected active channel in the received signal The numeric parameter with range 1 to 9 specifies the byte in the order listed under SENSe DATA POH ALL Syntax SENSe lt slot gt DATA POH BYTE lt NR1 gt SENSe DATA POH BYTE C2A This query returns th
236. st be selected as the Active Channel Test Pattern Select POS from the drop down menu under Active Channel Test Pattern in the Receiver Setup menu The following setup conditions must exist before POS can be selected VV VV V e Signal Source is set to Internal e Timing Source is set to Internal e Signal Structure is set to STS 192c NOTE To transmit a POS test pattern the Signal Structure must be set to STS 192c and the signal source cannot be through mode SPE VC3 Stuff Column Control The stuff column control allows column 30 and column 59 of the SPE VC3 to be stuffed with either all zeros or with the payload pattern This option is only available if the Signal Structure is STS 1 or VC3 Set channel from 1 to 192 or set all OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Background Channels The Background Channels section controls the settings for signal structure and test pattern of the non active channels Signal Structure Signal structure allows the user to choose the mapping structure for the background channels of the transmitted signal The mapping structures provided for background channels are listed in the table below SONET SDH 1 x STS 192c 1 x VC4 64c 4 x STS 48c 4 x VC4 16c 16 x STS 12c 12 x VC4 4c 64 x STS 3c 64 x VC4 192 x STS 1 192 x VC3 Test Pattern Test Pattern allows the user to select one of four available patterns to fill the background of the internall
237. stating that a slot number is required 2 86 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Results Files Every time a test is started data files are generated These files are stored on the C drive in a folder marked Tektronix Measurement Data To view these files from the user interface click on View and select Test Results Files The Results Viewer dialog box is displayed Refer to the Results Viewer description in this section for further information Results File Management As tests are run measurement data files accumulate in the Tektronix Measurement Data folder Once this folder becomes large from the quantity and size of the files overall system performance will suffer The OTS system provides a results file cleanup tool to assist in automatically managing these files NOTE By default the system will keep only the most recent 100 results files If there is a need to preserve all results files the user must explicitly disable results file cleanup before any tests are run To access the Results File Management tool click on the Systems menu and select Results File Management The Results File Deletion Parameters dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2 64 All cleanup parameters may be independently enabled or disabled by modifying the check box to the left of the relevant parameter Disabled parameters will retain their prior settings while disabled The value fields for disabled will
238. switch to green when the system has finished initializing NOTE If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing call Tektronix for service The Optics Transceiver card of the OTS9100 module provides all of the optical interfaces of the 10Gb s SDH SONET module Figure 2 2 shows the Optic Transceiver card front panel WARNING Always avoid exposure to the laser beam Before power is applied to the OTS9100 module be sure that all laser outputs are either covered with the screw cap provided or connected to the appropriate circuit Keeping a laser output covered prevents dirt from contaminating the connector Optical OUT 2 2 The Optical Output transmits an optical data signal at a wavelength of 1310 nm or 1550 nm with the proper installed option The optical connector can be configured with field interchangeable shells FC standard ST or SC type The field interchangeable shells are easily removed to allow cleaning of the optical connector interface The LED found under Optical OUT will light to green when the laser is active NOTE If the LED lights red or fails to light at all call Tektronix for service Tektronix OTS91L4 hayes o A OPTICAL OUT fe 10Gb s SIG PRES O OPTICAL IN Tx DATA IN e102 OC192 STM64 1310nm Rx Tx Figure 2 2 1310 nm Transceiver Front Panel OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics Functional Overview Optical IN The Optic
239. t 16 Bytes OSEF oo OFAS OTSSIT3 i r HDLC bytes with corect FCS 21854405920 a m Receiver IP Packets OAIS L Total Packets 14530855 Op2 ORDIL Packets with valid checksum 14530855 OREM Packets with invalid checksum 0 Oals P OLOP P Packets with no errors 14530855 OB3 Packets with payload errors 0 RDI P OREI P APS Meas a OTIM P LOCKOUT ETO ye Laser 4 Figure 2 7 Receiver IP Measurements display The IP Packets section results are only updated for HDLC frames with correct FCS Within the IP Packets the payload is only verified for packets with a valid header checksum Packets with No Errors are packets with correct FCS valid header checksum and no IP payload errors 2 72 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Transmitter IP Measurements When Measurements is selected from the Navigation window the Measurements menu is displayed Ifa transmitter icon is clicked the Transmitter Measurements menu is displayed This menu as shown in Figure 2 8 provides summary results of the transmitted HDLC Frames and the IP Packets transmitted and transmitted with errors NOTE Traffic has to be started to get statistics B System View Device Window Help 18 x e E EAA GB A on onfantasers z Ar gt m m efanTests gt z Measurements OTS91T3 10 Gb s Tx 1 T Setup Clear History m Transmitter HDLC Frames Bytes Slot 2 0TS91Rz og ro Correct FCS frames 14530855 OTSSIR
240. t 10 Input Reflectance lt 27 dB Jitter Tolerance meets limits for OC 192c and SMT 64c network interface specifications per GR 1377 CORE Issue 5 12 98 and G 825 2 99 Description Primary optical input from device under test Event Trigger Output Connector SMA External Termination 50Q DC coupled Voltage Output LOW 0 8V Vol 2 0 0V Voltage Output HIGH 3 8V Voh 2 1 7V Pulse Width 25 7 ns nominal Description User specified to be asserted active HIGH for each generated Alarm or Error RX Clock Output Connector SMA External Termination 50Q DC Coupled Voltage Output LOW 0 80 V 0 20 V Description Used for Transceiver supporting through mode RX Data Input Connector SMA Internal Termination 50Q DC coupled Voltage Level 1 Vpp typical Frequency 9 95238 GB s Data Description Electrical Data signal from the Optics card A 14 OTS9100 User Manual Specifications Module Interconnect Specifications Signal Name Tx Data Out Tx Data In Connector SMA Voltage Level 0 5 Vpp typical Description Electrical data signal Connect Tx DATA OUT Transmit card to Tx DATA IN Optics card with Tektronix supplied cable accessories Signal Name Rx Data Out Rx Data In Connector SMA Voltage Level 0 70 Vpp typical Description Electrical data signal Connect Rx DATA OUT Optics card to Rx DATA IN Receive card with Tektronix supplied cable accessories SMA SMA coax and DC Block
241. t DATA BACKground STRUcture lt Enum gt Parameters Description G10C Bulk data at 10 Gb s G2P5C Bulk data at 2 5 Gb s M622C Bulk data at 622 Mb s M155C Bulk data at 155 Mb s M51A Bulk data at 51 Mb s SONET only OTS9100 User Manual 3 45 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA CHANnel This command sets the active channel of the signal generated by the OTS 9000 transmitter The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA CHANnel SOURce lt slot gt DATA CHANnel lt NR1 gt SOURce DATA CHANnel REPLicate This command enables insertion of the active channel payload into all channels of the generated signal When enabled all channels contain identical payload data and the background channel settings have no effect The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA CHANnel REPLicate SOURce lt slot gt DATA CHANnel REPLicate lt Boolean gt SOURce DATA HDLC IFRame GAP This query returns the HDLC inter frame gap Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA HDLC IFRame GAP SOURce DATA IP HEADer ADDRess DEST This command sets the transmitter IP header destination address The query form returns the current settings The first parameter specifies the first most significant byte The last parameter specifies the least significant byte Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer ADDRess DEST SOURce lt slot gt DATA IP HEADer ADDRess DEST lt
242. t The active channel range is dependent upon the structure and is so limited The user may control the structure the SPE VC3 Stuff column control and the test pattern for each active channel Background Channel The user may control structure SPE VC3 Stuff column control and test pattern NOTE The background structure can never be ST 192c or VC 4 64c as that would take up the entire signal Test Patterns The test patterns available include PN15 PN15 Inverted PN23 PN23 Inverted ITU T 0 181 PN31 PN31 Inverted All zeros All ones Fixed 8 bit Data user editable A 4 OTS9100 User Manual Specifications Overhead Manipulation Specifications Subsequent to the default values the following overhead modifications are possible The following bytes can be individually selected and edited JO J1 El Fl F2 D1 D3 G1 H4 K1 K2 D4 D12 S1 M1 E2 Z0 Z3 Z4 Z5 C2 of the active POH all other C2 bytes can be set to a user selectable 8 bit value Z0 bytes 2 through 192 may be edited to a fixed byte value set to the column number ITU G 783 set to OxCC GR 253 or set to a series of Consecutive Identical Digits CID JO editing Single byte 16 byte sequence ITU T 64 byte sequence SONET J1 editing Single byte 16 byte sequence ITU T 64 byte sequence SONET Some bytes can be altered through alarm and error generation as follows 1 Generating errored frames will invert all 192 Al and A2 bits 2 Generat
243. t NR1 gt SOURce lt slot gt DATA TOH STS1A BYTE lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt OTS9100 User Manual 3 57 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce DATA TOH STS1A DEFAult This command sets all bytes in the generated STS 1 1 Transport Overhead data to their default values Syntax SOURce lt slot gt DATA TOH STS1A DEFAult SOURce INSErt ANOMaly MODE This command specifies how anomalies are inserted The query form returns the current setting Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt ANOMaly MODE SOURce lt slot gt INSErt ANOMaly MODE lt Enum gt Parameter NONE SINGle BURSt Description Anomaly insertion is disabled A single anomaly is inserted A burst of anomalies is inserted SOURce INSErt ANOMaly RATE This command sets the rate at which continuously generated anomalies are inserted The query form returns the current value Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt ANOMaly RATE SOURce lt slot gt INSErt ANOMaly RATE lt NR3 gt SOURce INSErt ANOMaly RATE RANGe This query returns the minimum and maximum rate values for the specified anomaly type Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt ANOMaly RATE RANGe lt Enum gt Parameters NONE B1BIP B2BIP B3BIP REI REI_P PATTern RANDom BIT_SPE BIT_VC 3 58 Description No anomaly is selected B1 parity errors B2 parity errors B3 parity errors Line REI errors Path REI errors Pattern bit errors Errors in randomly selected
244. ta in the floppy disk will be erased 6 The computer now creates your emergency disk The computer erases the disk and then copies the pertinent files onto it 7 When the computer finishes it will prompt you with a final message Exit the repair disk utility and remove your floppy disk Be sure to store it in a safe location C 2 OTS9100 User Manual AIS L AMI ANSI ASCII BBE BER BIP BIP 8 CFR CSES CV EB ES ESA ESB FAS IEC ITU JO TIM LOF LOS MS MS AIS MS RDI MS REI NE OC OC N OOF OS RAI OTS9100 User Manual List of Acronyms Line Alarm Indication Signal Alternate Mark Inversion American National Standards Institute American Standard Code for Information Interchange Background Block Error Bit Error Ratio Bit Interleaved Parity Bit Interleaved Parity 8 Code of Federal Regulations Consecutive Severely Errored Second Coding Violation Errored Block Errored Second Errored Second Type A Errored Second Type B Frame Alignment Signal International Electrotechnical Commission International Telecommunications Union JO Trace Identifier Marker Loss of Frame Loss of Signal Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Alarm Indication Signal Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication Network Element Optical Carrier Optical Carrier level N Out of Frame Operating System Remote Alarm Indication D 1 List of Acronyms D 2 RAI L RDI RDI
245. teger values that represent the status conditions listed in the table above The parameters are returned as hexadecimal base 16 numbers Each condition appears as a bit value in one of the four parameter values returned the particular parameter and bit value appears in the table above Note that the high order eight bits of each parameter identify the parameter in question and do not represent LED status conditions The optional time parameter specifies the earliest time of interest Syntax SENSe lt slot gt STATus PATH LEDS HEXadecimal lt NR1 gt SENSe STATus PATH LEDS NUMEric This query is an alternative form of SENSe STATus PATH LEDS It returns a time value and three integer values that represent the status conditions listed in the table above The parameters are returned as decimal numbers Each condition appears as a bit value in one of the four parameter values returned the particular parameter and bit value appears in the table above Note that the high order eight bits of each parameter identify the parameter in question and do not represent LED status conditions The optional time parameter specifies the earliest time of interest Syntax SENSe lt slot gt STATus PATH LEDS NUMEric lt NR1 gt OTS9100 User Manual 3 43 Reference Remote Commands Command Description SENSe TEST DESCription This command sets the description text that is written to the results file at the start of a text The text may be up to 127
246. the Start Continuous Insertion button is clicked errors are continuously inserted into the IP Payload The button changes to say Stop Insertion and ACTIVE is displayed in the Current Error Insertion menu area To stop the error insertion click the Stop Insertion button The active notice is no longer displayed and the button name returns to Start Continuous Insertion 2 46 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Receiver Signal The signal menu of the Receiver setup as shown in Figure 2 26 allows the user to set the signal standard and structure the active channel the test pattern and the output pulse trigger This menu also indicates the current value of the receiver threshold offset Drop down menus provide other choices for test analysis Each of the selections available is described in more detail in the following sections m Setup OTSITR2 10 Gbis Rx 1 Signal Trace Mismatch IP Setup oo Signal OTS91R1 10 Gb s Rx 1 Signal Standard SONET x Signal Structure STS 3c OTS91R2 a E gt Active Channel 1 Set Channel Zs Test Pattern PRBS 2 23 1 Inverted ITU 0 151 ig OTS91T1 10 Gb s Tx 1 Trigger Output V Anomaly Defect Payload bit error L SPE VCS Stuff SSS SSE 5 Column Control OTSS1T3 10 Gh s Tx 1 Receiver Threshold Offset Current Value 0 mv OTS92R1 Jitter MERA Edit Rx Threshold Offset Signal Monitor Compliance Figure 2 26
247. the screw cap provided or connected to the appropriate circuit OTS 9100 User Manual Figure 2 3 1550 nm Transceiver Front Panel 2 3 Operating Basics Functional Overview Laser Lockout Remote Interlock 2 4 REMOTE INTERLOCK is a bantam plug normally closed connection internally wired in series with the laser lockout key switch It can be used with additional hardware to remotely disable the laser output NOTE If this connection is used the ferrite bead provided with the module must be attached to the remote interlock cable for lower emissions and CE mark conformance Install the bead close to the end of the cable connected to the Optics card Laser LOCKOUT is a safety device The key switch disables the laser output when it is turned to the closed lock position The laser output can only be turned on when the key is in the open lock position NOTE The laser output cannot be enabled unless e The Laser Lockout key switch is set to the open lock or on position e The Remote Interlock is either not used or externally enabled e The Laser output is software enabled NOTE Optical cables use and care 1 When using the optical cables ensure that the cable is firmly seated in the front panel connector The optical connectors on the front panel are keyed If the cable is not inserted into the connector key properly the connection between cable and front panel will not be complete and so wi
248. ttings Signal standard Laser off on Laser information Line rate Data source internal or through Clock source Signal structure Active payload channel Payload data Background pattern Background structure Anomaly insertion Defect insertion Generate trigger on anomaly or defect JO section trace J1 Path trace Transport overhead data Path overhead data Path overhead C2 byte Through mode overhead insertion Through mode parity calculation Optical output laser OTS9100 User Manual source signal standard source output laser source output laser info source data rate source data source source clock source source data structure source data channel source data payload pattern source data payload background pattern source data background structure source insert anomaly source insert defect source trigger mode source data section trace source data path trace source data toh source data poh source data poh c2a source data overhead passthrough source data parity loop sense optical 3 5 Reference Remote Commands Syntax Syntax This section contains information on the Standard commands for Programmable Instruments SCPIJ and IEEE 488 2 Common Commands that may be used to program the OTS9100 10Gb s SDH SONET module IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Description ANSI IEEE Standard 488 2 defines the codes formats protocols and usage of common commands and queries used on the GPI
249. uces duce dzetcetssecedecedsecececusseteetvses D 1 Installing the Software ccccceeesenteeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeseeneeeeeseeneeeaseeneeenseeneeeenees E 1 Module Card Replacement scccescseiennesneneneneceeseenesinsesneseessneesneneenecnsnenes F 1 Illustrations Of cabled OTS9100 uu cc ccsseeseccsssesecceeeeeeaueeeeeusseseaeeeseeeauseseeneseseaneees G 1 iv OTS9100 User Manual General Safety Summary How Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any equipment connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system to Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Use Proper Power Cord To avoid fire hazard use only the power cord specified for this product Use Proper Power Source Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the voltage specified Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Avoid Electric Overload To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not apply a voltage to a terminal that is outside the range specified for that terminal Ground the Product This product is grounded thro
250. uery form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork PROMpt SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork PROMpt lt Boolean gt SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RXTERM 3 66 This command sets the initial selection for new network connections of the character recognized as End of Input This setting has no effect on connections already established see SYSTEM COMMUNICATE PORT RXTERM The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RXTERM SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RXTERM lt Enum gt Parameters Description LF Line feed LF character 0x0A an optional preceding CR is ignored CR Carriage return CR character 0x0D an optional preceding LF is ignored OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork TXTERM This command sets the initial selection for new network connections of the characters sent at the end of a query response This setting has no effect on connections already established see lt SYSTEM COMMUNICATE PORT TXTERM The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork TXTERM SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork TXTERM lt Enum gt Parameters Description LF Line feed LF character Ox0A CR Carriage return CR character Ox0D CRLF CR followed by LF LFCR LF followed by CR SYSTem COMMunicate PORT ECHO The PORT commands affect the character based remote control port serial port or netwo
251. ugh the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product The common terminal is at ground potential Do not connect the common terminal to elevated voltages Do not apply a potential to any terminal including the common terminal that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal Use Proper AC Adapter Use only the AC adapter specified for this product Do Not Look into the End of a Fibreglass Cable Never look into the end of a fibreglass cable or a single fibre which could be connected to a laser source Laser radiation can damage your eyes because it is invisible and your pupils do not contract instinctively as with normal bright light If you think your eyes have been exposed to laser radiation you should have your eyes checked immediately by an eye doctor The optical output s radiation power corresponds to the laser class in accordance with IEC 825 1 11 93 Use Proper Fuse To avoid fire hazard use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when p
252. uous defect anomaly insertion is inactive CONT_DWELL Continuous defect anomaly insertion is active SOURce INSErt DEFEct TIME This command sets the duration of timed defect insertion in the units appropriate to the selected defect The query form returns the current value Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt DEFEct TIME SOURce lt slot gt INSErt DEFEct TIME lt NR1 gt 3 60 OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SOURce INSErt DEFEct TIME RANGe This query returns a units keyword and two integer numbers representing the minimum and maximum duration values for timed defects The units keyword is one of FRAME US MS S SEC10 0 1S and SEC100 0 01S Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt DEFEct TIME RANGe lt Enum gt Parameter Description NONE No defect is selected LOS Loss of signal LOF Loss of frame AIS_L Line AIS RDI_L Line RDI AIS_P Path AIS RDI_P Path RDI RDIPAY_P Path RDI Payload RDISRV_P Path RDI Server RDICON_P Path RDI Connectivity LOP_P Path loss of pointer SOURce INSErt DEFEct TY PE This command selects the type of defect inserted The query form returns the current selection Syntax SOURce lt slot gt INSErt DEFEct TYPE SOURce lt slot gt INSErt DEFEct TYPE lt Enum gt Parameters NONE LOS LOF AlS_L RDI_L AlS_P RDI P RDIPAY_P RDISRV_P RDICON_P LOP_P Description No defect is selected Loss of signal Loss of frame Line AIS
253. upport through mode OTS9010 Chassis e g EGA 4 OTS9100 2 slots Module for CPU Figure 1 2 OTS9040 with OTS9100 installation The slot assignments shown in Figure 1 2 show an OTS9100 module loaded into an OTS9040 chassis 1 10 OTS9100 User Manual Getting Started Module Card Interconnection Before powering on the system install the cables and DC blocks provided for signal interconnection of the module cards Use Figure 1 3 as a reference guide See Appendix G for cabling an OTS9100 module with a tunable laser NOTE Depending upon the configuration of the OTS cards within the OTS 9000 some of these connections may not need to be made If multiple cards are present within the system the 8 cables provided may be required in place of the 4 cables 1 Attach a 4 or 6 coax cable from the Rx DATA OUT port of the Optical card Connect the other end of the cable to the Rx DATA IN port DC block located on the Receive card The Optical card is now connected to the Receive card 2 Attach a 4 or 6 coax cable to the Tx DATA IN port of the Optics card Connect the other end of the 4 or 6 coax cable from the Tx DATA IN port to the Tx DATA OUT Tx port of the Transmit card The Optical card is now connected to the Transmit card 3 For through mode only Attach a 4 or 6 coax cable to the Rx CLOCK OUT port of the Receive card Connect the other end of the cable to the Rx CLOCK IN port
254. user interface automatically scans for loaded hardware and displays E ETA the appropriate folders and icons for the hardware on that server oe i orsaita 1 For example the sample screen reflects three transmitters _OTS92R1 1 OTS91T1 OTS91T3 and OTS92T1 two receivers OTS91R2 and _orseasi 1 OTS92R1 and one synchronization card OTS92S1 Each card is pena represented with a separate icon Multiple icons of the same type z provide the same screens but contain custom controls for each SIMMEN specific card Category View Device View Note Pay attention to the relationship between the icon selected in the Navigation window to the Active Title Bar When changing screen controls by clicking on a category title in the Navigation window ensure that the correct device is still currently activated A new device icon in the Navigation window must be clicked to change the associated screen menu OTS9100 User Manual 2 23 Operating Basics User Interface OTS91R1 1 OTS91R2 1 Scroll Buttons The scroll buttons are part of the Navigation window They provide scroll support for accessing any card icons that are beyond the immediate viewable oe OTS91T1 1 area of the Navigation window frame OTS91T3 1 Note The Navigation window is a dockable window Double click on the horizontal grabbers at the top of the window frame to undock the window and float it within the OTS interface To redock o
255. visits consume system resources It is important to understand that this is a requested minimum interval actual intervals are based on free CPU cycles Syntax SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts INTErval SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts INTErval lt NR1 gt SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts PERcent 3 78 This command sets the maximum percentage of disk volume that files are allowed to consume before deletion begins The order in which files are deleted is based on the sort criteria see the SORT command below The query form returns the current setting Syntax SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts PERcent SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts PERcent lt NR1 gt OTS9100 User Manual Reference Remote Commands Command Description SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts SORT This command defines the sorting method by which files are prioritized for deletion The system default is by a file s creation time The query form returns the current sorting method Syntax SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts SORT SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIts SORT lt Enum gt Parameters Description CREAted Sort by creation time MODified Sort by last modified time ACCEssed Sort by last accessed time SYSTem FILEs MGMT RESUIlts TOTAIsize This command sets the maximum amount of space combined files are allowed to span before deletion is initiated The order in which files are deleted is based on the sort criteria see the SORT command below The query form returns the current setting NOTE
256. x 2 100 OTS9100 User Manual Operating Basics User Interface Checking a check box on a receiver s panel enables logging for the corresponding event on that receiver The events selected are saved in persistent storage on the OTS system and are restored when the Event Printer application is next started Muting Event Printer behavior with continuous events When Event Printer logs events in five consecutive seconds it follows the last event with the words MUTE ON and suppresses further logging When a one second interval occurs in which no loggable events occur Event Printer logs the event as MUTE OFF and resumes normal event logging Minimizing the Event Printer window The Event Printer application may be minimized so that its window is not displayed but its button is visible in the Windows Taskbar It continues to log events while minimized Exiting the Event Printer application stops the logging of events Configuring a printer in Windows Printing events as they occur is only possible with a printer capable of printing a single line at a time e g a dot matrix printer Printers such as laser printers which print an entire page at a time cannot do this To use a suitably capable printer for line at a time operation configure it as follows 1 In the Windows Start Menu select Settings gt Printers 2 Right click the printer selected as the default Windows printer and select Properties 3 Select the Scheduling ta
257. x and type in the new selection The IP Source Address contains a four byte 32 bit with IPv4 Internet address This address identifies the original source of the packets The IP Destination Address contains a four byte 32 bit with IPv4 Internet address This address identifies the final destination of the packets Setup OTS91T3 10 Gb s Tx 1 Signal Transport Overhead Path Overhead Error Insertion K1 K2 Decade IP Payload P Eror Insertion Traffic ma Header amp Stop Edit P Header Edit IP Header x C Start a Version l 4 Stream Index 1 Ec Type of service 2 IP Setup _________ Packet size 7496 POS Scrambling On Identification 0 IP Payload PRBS 2 31 1 Flag l 2 Time to Live 64 Interframe Gap f16 Protocol 99 IP Source Addr 192 168 45 1 IP Dest Addr 192 168 53 1 OK Apply Cancel Figure 2 27 Edit Menu for IP Header OTS9100 User manual Operating Basics User Interface Transmitter IP Error Insertion The IP Error Insertion Property menu consists of property controls for Stream Index Error Selection Error Type Error Rate Minimum Rate Maximum Rate and Current Error Insertion display drop down menus supply other options for each category Setup OTSI1T3 10 Gbis Tx 1 Signal Transport Overhead Path Overhead Error Insertion K1 K2 Decode IP Payload IP Error Insertion Stream Index 1 4 Edit Error Selection Current Error Insert
258. xed 15dB optical attenuator ST PC connector International Power Plug Options Chassis Only 1 6 Option A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A99 Description 220V Euro Plug 240V UK Plug 240V Aust Plug 240V North American Plug 220V Swiss Plug No power cord OTS9100 User Manual Getting Started First Operation OTS9100 Installation Before using the system verify that it is properly set up and powered on as follows l 2 U A A A Remove the unit from its shipping carton and place it on an anti static surface Verify that the operating environment is within the limits detailed under the Environmental Requirement section in this manual Allow approximately 2 inches 5 cm clearance for cooling at the front and rear of the unit The fans draw air into the system from the front and exhaust the air through the rear of the OTS9000 chassis system or through the sides of the OTS9010 and OTS9040 chassis systems If the module cards are not already installed perform the following steps CAUTION When installing and removing cards from the chassis power must not be present Ensure that all power switches are in the OFF position and power cords are not installed before removing or installing cards The chassis does NOT support hot swap installations A Remove the cards from the packaging if necessary CAUTION All OTS cards are static sensitive When handling cards ensure that personnel are properly grou
259. xtinction for Continuos LOS insertion gt 30 dB This output can be locked out for safety as UL safety requirements specify using the front panel key switch or remote interlock Fiber Type Single Mode Modulator Type Mach Zender Lithium Niobate Description Primary output to device under test OTS91L7 OTS91L8 Signal Name 9 95238 Gb s Optical Input Wavelength 1528 nm 1565 nm Average Power 0dBm 16dBm Insertion Loss lt 7 5dB 6 0dB typical NOTE There is a 3dB reduction in measured power with a 50 duty cycle modulated signal Optical Source Polarization Extinction gt 14dB Connector FC PC standard SC or ST available Fiber Type Input Polarization maintaining PM Panda type Description Optical input for external optical source OTS9100 User Manual A 9 Specifications OTS91L7 OTS91L8 Signal Name 9 95238 Gb s Optical Output Data Signal Rate 9 95238 Gb s 100ppm Pulse Mask Compliance GR 253 SONET G 957 SDH Data Format PN7 scrambled NRZ formatted data in BERT mode unframed and unscrambled PRBS data Wavelength 1528 nm 1565 nm Determined by user supplied external optical source Average Power NA Determined by user supplied external optical source Extinction Ratio gt 10 dB minimum 12 dB typical Wavelength Aging Drift NA Determined by user supplied external optical source Sidemode Suppression NA Determined by user supplied external optical source Chirp o amp
260. y generated 9 95238 Gb s signal The default pattern fill is inverted PN23 The patterns available are gt Inverted PN23 ITU 0 151 gt All Zeros gt All Ones gt Fixed Data 8 bit When Fixed Data is selected a button marked Edit Fixed Data is displayed To change the Fixed Data to a different value click the Edit Fixed Data button and type the new value into the text box beside the button In the Test Pattern selection box observe that the value after Fixed Data changes to match the newly entered value SPE VC3 Stuff Column Control The stuff column control allows column 30 and column 59 of the SPE VC3 to be stuffed with either all zeros or with the selected payload pattern This option is only available if the pattern Background Signal Structure is STS 1 or VC3 OTS9100 User Manual 2 29 Operating Basics User Interface Transmitter Transport Overhead 2 30 The Transport overhead property menu as shown in Figure 2 11 can be used to pass or change the 9 95238 Gb s signal overhead bytes in the first STS 1 or STM 1 of the OC 192 or STM 64 frame respectively In addition the JO Trace and S1 byte may be edited The editing procedure for each is described in more detail in the following sections NOTE Overhead data displays are in hexadecimal format All edits to overhead display must be in hexadecimal format OTSSIRI Overhead for STS 1 1 Through Mode Z0 Byte Da
261. y to uniquely identify each of the multiple channels being carried in a Dense Wave Division Multiplexer DWDM system providing an end to end continuity check To analyze ensure the box beside the Analyze J1 Trace Mismatch is checked To edit click on the Edit Expected J1 Trace button A dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2 30 reflecting the current settings of the J1 Trace Click the appropriate radio button to choose between No Trace 16 Byte Trace and 64 Byte Trace To input a Trace Value click in the Trace Value box and start typing In 16 byte the last byte is filled with CRC In 64 byte the last two bytes are filled with CR LF Ji Trace Editor C No Trace 16 Byte Trace G 707 Hevyalue 64 Byte Trace GR 253 Trace Value Tektronix BTT Figure 2 30 J1 Trace Editor dialog box Edit C2 Byte OTS9100 User Manual 2 51 Operating Basics User Interface The C2 byte is the Path Signal label The C2 byte can be any value from 0x00 to OxFF and may be set in hexadecimal or symbolic form To edit click the Edit Expected C2 button This brings up a dialog box shown in Figure 2 31 The dialog box displays the current C2 setting and allows the option to edit the byte via hexadecimal or symbolic form a subset of 0x00 0xFF Set Expected C2 Byte Value Symbolic 01 Equipped Nonspecific Payload Hex fr conce Figure 2 31 Edit C2 dialog box To change the setting click the radio butto

Tektronix Telescope 071-0855-05 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents